625535

Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome Handleiding

7
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/270
Pagina verder
© 2010 Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG, Isny
Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Instruction manual
Instruction manual
Congratulations
We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from Deth-
leffs.
Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home" out
in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that you can enjoy
your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for 80 years and knows what is important. This
experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly functional equipment as well as in the out-
standing driving characteristics.
Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that our prod-
ucts have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our products and grant
you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see section 1.1).
This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important information
and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have also included
a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value.
In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances.
For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised specialist
workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably.
In the event of chassis-related problems with Dethleff vehicles, authorised workshops of the base vehicle manufac-
turer are able to provide assistance. If you encounter problems on the Fiat chassis, please call the phone number
00800 34281111.
We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times.
Your Dethleffs team
Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Instruction manual
We reserve the right to alter the construction, equipment and the scope of delivery. Special equipment is also listed
that is not included in the standard scope of delivery. The descriptions and illustrations in this brochure do not relate
to a particular version. For all details, only the respective equipment list is valid.
Vehicle data
Model:
Car manufacturer/type of engine:
Serial number:
Initial registration:
Purchased from company:
Expiry of the guarantee period:
Key number:
Chassis number:
Family Card with long-term warranty yes/no
Customer Address
Surname, Christian name:
Street, No.:
Postal code, town:
Dealer's stamp and signature
3Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Contents
1 Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Guarantee conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Inspection records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Inspection plan for annual inspection . . . . 11
1.4 Inspection plan for water ingress test. . . . . 12
2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2 Environmental tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3 Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.3 In case of fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.7 Water system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1 Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1.2 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.3.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.3.4 Roof load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space . . . . . . . . . .30
4.3.6 Double floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.7 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.8 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.3.9 Load rack, extendable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.5 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance step . . . . 35
4.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step . . . . . . . 35
4.6 PVC-floor covering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.7 Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.8 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.9 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.1 Driving the motorhome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.2 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.3 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly . . . . . . . . . 43
5.4.2 Adjusting the seat belt correctly. . . . . . . . . . 43
5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat. . . 43
5.5.1 Seats (Aguti). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.5.2 Seats (ISRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.6 Headrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism for
bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.8 Seating arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.9 Branch block (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.10 Electrical window winders (model I) . . . . . 48
5.11 Electrically adjustable external mirrors
(model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.12 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's
window and front passenger's window . . 49
5.13 Writing and reading rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.14 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.14.1 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.15 Filliing with washer fluid (model I) . . . . . . . 51
5.16 Checking the oil level (model I) . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.17 Filling up with diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6 Pitching the motorhome. . . . . . . .53
6.1 Handbrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.2 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.3 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.4 Supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.4.2 Steady legs (SAWIKO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.5 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7 Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
7.1 Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (with recessed
handle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal). . . . . . . . 58
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob) . . . . . 59
7.1.5 Conversion door, inside (with locking
lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) . . . . . . . . . 60
7.1.7 Driver's door, outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.1.8 Driver's door, inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be folded out . . . 61
7.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion door,
extendable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.1.11 Window of conversion door (Hartal) . . . . . 62
7.2 External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.3 Ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.4.1 Sliding window with lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.4.2 Sliding window without lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges . . . . . . 67
7.4.4 Hinged window with automatic hinges . . 68
7.4.5 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen . . . . . . . . . 70
4 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Contents
7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's
window and front passenger's window . . 71
7.5 Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1) . . . . . . .72
7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2) . . . . . . .73
7.5.3 Heki skylight (mini and midi) . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.5.4 Wind-up skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.6 Rotating seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.7 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg . . . . . . . 76
7.7.2 Suspension table (bar seating group). . . . .78
7.7.3 Swivel table for the round seating group . 79
7.7.4 Fixed table (movable table-top) . . . . . . . . . .79
7.7.5 Fixed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.7.6 Lift-off table for the round seating group .81
7.8 Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.9 Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.10 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.11 Extending the seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.11.1 Extending the central seating group . . . . .84
7.12 Beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.12.1 Overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.12.3 Pull-down bed (model T). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.12.4 Bunk bed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.12.5 Bunk bed (side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.12.6 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . . . . . . 91
7.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping . . 91
7.13.1 Central seating group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.13.2 Central seating group with extension . . . . 93
7.13.3 Facing seating unit with extension . . . . . . . 94
7.13.4 Central seating group with divan. . . . . . . . . 95
7.13.5 Round seating group (without slatted
frame). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.13.6 Round seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.13.7 Front bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
7.13.9 Front bench seat with divan
(extendable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
7.13.10 Front bench seat with lengthwise seat . .101
7.13.11 Front seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
7.13.12 L-seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
7.13.13 Individual seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
8 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
8.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
8.3 Gas consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
8.4 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
8.5 Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
8.6 Hose break guard (crash protection unit)109
8.7 External gas connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
8.8 Duomatic switching facility . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
8.9 DuoControl switching facility . . . . . . . . . . .113
9 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
9.1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9.2 Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9.3 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.3.1 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.4 Charging the living area battery and
starter battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply. . . 118
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine. . . . . . 118
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger . . . . . . 118
9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99). . . . . . . . . . . 119
9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
9.5.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.5.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.5.4 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101) . . . . . . . . . 122
9.6.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
9.6.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
9.6.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.6.4 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.7 Panel IT 992. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water
or waste water levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery . 126
9.7.3 Current gauge for charging/discharging
the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9.7.4 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9.7.5 12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9.7.6 240 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
9.7.7 Switch for circulating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.8 Panel MP 20-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.8.1 240 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.8.2 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.8.3 Batteries gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.8.4 Tank gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.8.5 Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.8.6 Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.8.7 Clock gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.8.8 Switch for tank heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.9 240 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.9.1 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.9.2 Power cable for external 240 V
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.10 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.10.1 12 V fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.10.2 240 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10 Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-
hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.2.2 To heat properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger . . . . . . . 149
5Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Contents
10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . . . . .150
10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and waste
water pipes (winter comfort package) . . .151
10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit . . . . . . . . . . . .151
10.3 Air conditioning unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
10.3.1 Air conditioning unit Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . .152
10.3.2 Air conditioning unit (Teleco) . . . . . . . . . . .154
10.4 Boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the
right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .155
10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
10.4.4 Alde boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
10.5 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
10.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
10.5.4 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
10.5.5 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
10.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series, automatic
ignition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic
power selection and frame heater) . . . . . .169
10.6.4 Operation (Dometic 8 series) . . . . . . . . . . . .171
10.6.5 Operation (Dometic 8 series with manual
power selection MES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
10.6.6 Operation (Dometic 8 series with
automatic power selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
10.6.7 Operation (Thetford). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10.6.8 Refrigerator door locking mechanism . . .178
11 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
11.1 Water supply, general. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
11.2 Switch for water pump (winter comfort
package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
11.3 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
11.3.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap . . . . . .182
11.3.2 Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
11.3.3 Filling with water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
11.3.4 Draining water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
11.4 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
11.4.1 Waste water tank (models with
double floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
11.4.2 Waste water tank (models without
double floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
11.4.3 Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
11.5 Filling the water system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
11.6 Emptying the water system . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
11.7 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
11.7.1 Pull-out toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .190
11.7.2 Vario toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
11.8 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
11.8.3 Toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
11.8.4 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11.8.5 Removing the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
11.8.6 Emptying the cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12 Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
12.1 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner . . 199
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.1.4 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.1.5 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.1.6 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I) . . 201
12.2 Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.3 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system . . . . . . . . . . 203
12.4 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.5 Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.5.1 Toilet with separate water tank . . . . . . . . . 204
12.5.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.6 Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.6.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.6.2 Winter operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.6.3 At the end of the winter season. . . . . . . . . 206
12.7 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.7.1 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.7.2 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary
lay-up or after lay-up over winter . . . . . . . 209
13 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
13.1 Inspection work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
13.2 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
13.3 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.3.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.4 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.5 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.5.1 Air conditioning unit Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.5.2 Air conditioning unit (Teleco). . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes. . 215
13.6.1 Halogen spotlight (with glass shade). . . . 215
13.6.2 Halogen spotlight (movable) . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13.6.3 Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13.6.4 Living area lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13.6.5 Recessed halogen light with housing . . . 217
13.6.6 Recessed halogen light (flat). . . . . . . . . . . . 217
13.6.7 Surface-mounted halogen light driver's
cabin (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
13.6.8 Range hood light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
13.6.9 Wardrobe light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
13.7 Changing the battery of the wardrobe
light with LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
13.8 AL-KO rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Contents
13.9 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
13.10 Vehicle identification plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
13.11 Warning and information stickers . . . . . . .221
14 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
14.2 Tyre selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
14.3 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
14.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
14.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
14.6 Spare wheel support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
14.7 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
15 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
15.1 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
15.2 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
15.3 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
15.4 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
15.4.2 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
15.5 Heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
15.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES . . . . . . .235
15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES (error
diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series with AES . .237
15.6.4 Dometic 8 series with MES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
15.6.5 Dometic 8 series with AES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
15.7 Air conditioning unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
15.8 Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
15.10 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
16 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16.1 Weight details for special equipment. . . .243
17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . . . . . .247
17.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
17.3 Speed limits and permissible
dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
17.4 Driving with low beam in European
countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from
camping areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
17.6 Gas supply in European countries . . . . . . .254
17.7 Toll regulations in European countries. . .254
17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during
travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
17.9 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
17.10 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Guarantee
1
7Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
1Guarantee
1.1 Guarantee conditions
1. In addition to the legal guarantee and product warranty rights due to the cus-
tomer, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG may also grant a guarantee of six years that
the vehicles constructed by the company are sealed in such a manner that
moisture cannot penetrate from the outside into the interior of the vehicle.
The guarantee obligations do not apply if the leakage is a result of improper
handling of the windows, doors and skylights or damage that has not been
properly repaired. Damage that is caused by forces of nature (e.g. flooding) is
not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee extensions include only the cor-
rect repair work. Conversion or diminution as well as travelling expenses or
other indirect costs are not covered by the guarantee.
2. When dealing with a case of leakage covered under the conditions of this guar-
antee, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG is obliged to rectify the defective vehicle part
concerned by repairing it free of charge or replacing the part, depending on
what is necessary to immediately to repair the damage.
Defects are to be rectified by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or by an authorised spe-
cialist workshop in accordance with the guidelines of Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
3. The prerequisite for this guarantee is that the vehicle must be presented once a
year to an authorised specialist workshop for an inspection. The presentation
must take place 2 months at the latest after the anniversary of the initial regis-
tration (or delivery).
If the inspection is not carried out according to schedule, this will nullify your
warranty. It cannot be renewed by carrying out an inspection at a later time.
As proof that the inspection has been completed, there are designated cou-
pons in the Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG guarantee booklet where inspection
stamps are to be glued and endorsed by a stamp, the date and the signature of
a respective Dethleffs dealer.
4. The guarantee begins on the day of the initial registration or delivery of the
vehicle to the customer, 1 year at the latest after delivery to the dealer, and is
valid while the vehicle is in use, for 6 years at the longest. If initial registration of
the vehicle precedes taking delivery, the warranty commences on the vehicle's
initial registration date (warranty qualifying date). A change of ownership of the
purchased object has no effect on the guarantee obligations. The guarantee
expires if the terms outlined in paragraph 3 are not complied with. The perform-
ance of guarantee work does not increase the guarantee period.
5. Parts installed to rectify faults are also guaranteed under the terms of the guar-
antee until the guarantee period expires.
6. If leakage occurs, the owner must notify Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or a Dethleffs
dealer of this in writing within 15 days of its detection. The guarantee certificate
and the corresponding guarantee stamps must be included with the notifica-
tion. If notification of leakage does not occur within the time limit stated, no
claims can be made under the terms of the guarantee.
Remedying of leakage will take place after approval has been given by
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
If no agreement is reached about the type, extent and result of the repairs,
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or the Dethleffs dealer will consult a neutral expert
whose decision is binding for all parties involved.
7. The costs of the inspection are to be paid by the party covered by the guar-
antee.
8. As far as legally permissible, the court responsible for Isny will be agreed upon
as the venue for jurisdiction.
Guarantee
1
8 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
1.2 Inspection records
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manu-
facturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service docu-
ments enclosed.
Delivery
Signature, date and stamp of the Dethl-
effs dealer:
1st year Water ingress test
Signature, date and stamp of the Dethl-
effs dealer:
Paste inspection stamp
here.
Water ingress test 1st year
Water ingress test 1st year
No defects found
Found defects:
Guarantee
1
9Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manu-
facturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service docu-
ments enclosed.
2nd year Water ingress test
Signature, date and stamp of the Dethl-
effs dealer:
Paste inspection stamp
here.
Water ingress test 2nd year
Water ingress test 2nd year
No defects found
Found defects:
3rd year Water ingress test
Signature, date and stamp of the Dethl-
effs dealer:
Paste inspection stamp
here.
Water ingress test 3rd year
Water ingress test 3rd year
No defects found
Found defects:
Guarantee
1
10 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the manu-
facturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the service docu-
ments enclosed.
4th year Water ingress test
Signature, date and stamp of the Dethl-
effs dealer:
Paste inspection stamp
here.
Water ingress test 4th year
Water ingress test 4th year
No defects found
Found defects:
5th year Water ingress test
Signature, date and stamp of the Dethl-
effs dealer:
Paste inspection stamp
here.
Water ingress test 5th year
Water ingress test 5th year
No defects found
Found defects:
Guarantee
1
11Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
1.3 Inspection plan for annual inspection
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
Pos. Component Activity Interval
1 Skylights Remove the inside frame
of the skylights and tight-
en the screw connections
of the securing clips
1. year
2 Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually
3 Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually
4 Refrigerator, heater, boiler,
cooker, lighting, storage flap
and door closures, toilet, seat
belts
Function check Annually
5 Windows, skylights Function check, water in-
gress test, applying talc
to the rubber seals
Annually
6 Upholstery, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually
7 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually
8 Water supply Water ingress test Annually
9 Hot-air system Function check, clean fan
wheel as necessary
Annually
10 Underbody protection, floor
skirt attachment
Visual check Annually
11 Pull-down bed suspension Function check Annually
12 Electrical system Function check Annually
13 Gas system Official gas inspection Every
two years
14 Connections between the chas-
sis and body
Check Every
two years
15 Underbody Visual check, repair un-
derbody protection as
necessary
Every
two years
Guarantee
1
12 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
1.4 Inspection plan for water ingress test
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
Pos. Component Activity
1.1 Wheel housing Visual check
1.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.2.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.2.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connection Visual check
1.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.3.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.3.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connection Visual check
1.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Visual check
1.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Visual check
1.6 Connection to driver's cabin Visual check
1.7 Base frame with base frame cut-outs Visual check
1.8 Check the status of the outer metal sheets Visual check
1.9 Check the status of the window rubbers, expansion
joints, sealing joints
Visual check
2.1 Measure the floor plateau at this connection point
with a moisture measuring device, write down the
corresponding values with the date of the assess-
ment. Prescribed maximum values – up to 20 %
normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to ac-
cumulated condensation.
Measuring
2.2 Measure inside the vehicle (walls, window sections,
roof, etc.), note changes in the colour of the decor.
Prescribed maximum values – up to 20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to ac-
cumulated condensation.
Measuring
3.1 Wheel housing Spray with Dethleffs spe-
cial weatherproof solu-
tion
3.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs spe-
cial weatherproof solu-
tion
3.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs spe-
cial weatherproof solu-
tion
3.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Spray with Dethleffs spe-
cial weatherproof solu-
tion
3.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Spray with Dethleffs spe-
cial weatherproof solu-
tion
Introduction
2
13Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
2Introduction
Please read this instruction manual completely before
using the vehicle for the first time!
Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users of the
safety regulations.
With your Dethleffs motorhome you will receive a file with the following vehicle
manuals and documents:
Dethleffs documents
z Instruction manual and service book (housing body)
z List of Dethleffs dealers
Additional documents
z Operating and installation instructions of various appliances
z Complete set of documents from the chassis manufacturer
z Test certificate for the gas system in accordance with German regulations
This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-specific
equipment or special equipment. These sections are not specially marked. It
may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special equipment. In
some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may therefore be different
from that shown in some illustrations and descriptions.
However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not described in
this instruction manual.
Special equipment is described when an explanation is required.
Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.
Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the instruc-
tions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed invalid.
Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand that we
reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. Therefore, no claims
can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the contents of this instruction
manual. The equipment which was known and included at the time of going to
press is described.
X The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.
Z The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to, or
inside the vehicle.
Z This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.
Z This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.
Z The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in direc-
tion of travel.
Z All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".
Z The metric specifications are binding for physical dimensions.
Introduction
2
14 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted without
prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.
2.1 General
The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the recog-
nised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and the vehicle
may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual are not fol-
lowed.
Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instructions
in the instruction manual.
Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be immedi-
ately remedied by qualified personnel. To avoid further damages, observe the duty
to avert, minimize or mitigate loss for the user during faults.
Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an author-
ised specialist workshop only.
Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the man-
ufacturer.
The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and acces-
sories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross weight.
Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.
2.2 Environmental tips
Z Be considerate of the environment.
Z Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to be dis-
posed of in drains or in the open countryside.
Z On board, collect waste water only in the waste water tank or – if necessary – in
other containers designed for that purpose.
Z Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at disposal
stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially provided for this
purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe the instructions at
caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations.
Z Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not completely full
(hygiene).
If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with fresh
water every time it is emptied.
Z Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty the
toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the level indi-
cator lights up.
Z Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet waste
also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority about dis-
posal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste paper baskets
which are situated at car parks.
Z Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this pur-
pose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of rubbish on
board.
Z When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When run-
ning idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The running
temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the vehicle is in
motion.
Introduction
2
15Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Z Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can also
be biologically degraded and only use small doses.
Z When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for parking
areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the town or com-
munity authority about parking spaces.
Z Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.
Introduction
2
16 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Safety
3
17Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
3Safety
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are for
the protection of persons and property.
The instructions address the following topics:
z fire prevention and what to do in case of fire
z general care of the vehicle
z road safety of the vehicle
z towing
z gas system of the vehicle
z electrical system of the vehicle
z water system of the vehicle
3.1 Fire prevention
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks
3.1.2 Fire-fighting
3.1.3 In case of fire
X Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
X Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances.
X Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be
a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard!
X Never use portable heating or cooking appliances.
X Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical
system, gas system or appliances.
X Always carry a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle. The fire extin-
guisher must be approved, tested and close at hand.
X The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery.
X Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qualified
personnel. Observe the date of testing.
X Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.
X Evacuate all passengers.
X Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains.
X Close regulator tap on the gas bottle.
X Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade.
X Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.
Z Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits.
Z Keep escape routes clear.
Z Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.
Safety
3
18 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered as
emergency exits:
z Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction
z Opening angle at least 70°
z Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm
z Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm
3.2 General
X The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas
operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a con-
stant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with
forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the
vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside
with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow
and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO
2
levels.
X Observe the headroom of the doors.
Z As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the base
vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals are author-
itative. It is imperative that they be observed.
Z Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight and
road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in the vehicle
papers.
Z Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Information
concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included in the
vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and service cen-
tres.
Z Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
Z If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are
provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight
exceeding 4 tonnes.
Z When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and win-
dows are closed.
Z Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard
warning light when this is required by law.
Z The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which is
valid for the respective vehicle class.
Z When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle and
the fitted appliances.
Safety
3
19Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
3.3 Road safety
X Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indicating
and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes.
X If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have
the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
X Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey,
ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
X Before commencing the journey, secure the hinged pull-down bed.
X Before commencing the journey, open and secure the shades on the wind-
screen and on the driver's and front passenger's windows.
X Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of
travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain
locked in place in the direction of travel.
X Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
X Before commencing the journey, place the television console in the alcove to
secure it from turning.
X Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen
support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet:
Close TV cabinet.
X During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see
chapter 5). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle docu-
ments.
X Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
X Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them
fastened during the journey.
X It is not permitted to stay in the alcove during the journey.
X Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for the
respective height and weight.
X Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
X The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving
technique accordingly.
X In case of underpasses, tunnels or similar obstacles, note the total height of
the vehicle (including the roof load).
X In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the
journey.
X Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure
causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can
lose control of the vehicle.
X Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger of
explosion!
X Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger of
suffocation!
Safety
3
20 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
3.4 Towing
3.5 Gas system
3.5.1 General instructions
Z Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the
vehicle (see chapter 4).
Z When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to load
luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible gross weight
and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents).
Z Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet com-
partment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrigerator
door securing device.
Z Before commencing the journey, lower the table and fix it to the holder on the
floor of the vehicle.
Z Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights.
Z Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
Z Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract the
corner steadies or steady legs, which are fitted to the vehicle.
Z Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position.
Z During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten the
wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect them at
regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated.
Z Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over time
(see chapter 14).
Z When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are sub-
jected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum
speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely covered with snow.
Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
X Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of accident
and injury!
X No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during posi-
tioning for connecting and detaching.
X Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas
equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap
on the gas bottle.
X No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be
in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of
explosion!
X Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces (e.g.
garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
X Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an authorised
specialist workshop.
X Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have
the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
Safety
3
21Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
X The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected.
The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The
vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is carried out.
X In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there
is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle immediately.
Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
X If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames,
and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
X Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open
windows or the skylight.
X Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
X If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas iso-
lator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas iso-
lator tap.
X Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.
X The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane
gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas
devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
X Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas gas-
ifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane
gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
X Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tight-
ness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the
gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist workshop no later than
ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must
see to it that the parts are replaced.
X Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space
which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced
ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.
X Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-
proof.
X Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this,
lock the compartment.
X The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
X Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed
for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
X The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the
vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence
of damage.
X Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and
fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust
pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and
ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.
Safety
3
22 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
3.5.2 Gas bottles
3.6 Electrical system
3.7 Water system
X Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle com-
partment.
X Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
X Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
X If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protec-
tive cap on top.
X Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regulator or
gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
X The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a suit-
able gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
X Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for
vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot
meet the demanding requirements.
X Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 °C.
X Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check
valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in excep-
tional cases with a safety valve.
X Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles.
X Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
X Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
X Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices and
lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the mains.
X Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.
X Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has
been remedied.
X Never bridge or repair fuses.
X Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrink-
able after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thor-
oughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the
vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
X In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system
before using the vehicle.
Z If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk
of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central posi-
tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open.
Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-
carrying components can be avoided in this way.
Before the journey
4
23Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4Before the journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com-
mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
z keys
z registration
z calculating the payload
z correct loading of the vehicle
z towing
z retracting and extending the entrance step
z PVC-floor covering
z storing the television
z using snow chains
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the
most important points.
4.1 Keys
The following keys are included with your vehicle:
4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van
Two keys for
z ignition lock
z driver's and passenger's doors
z fuel tank
Two keys for
z conversion door of the body
z drinking water filler neck (only with external drinking water filler neck)
z external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.
4.1.2 Model I
Two keys for
z ignition lock
Two keys for
z driver's door
z fuel tank
z conversion door of the body
z drinking water filler neck
z external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.
Before the journey
4
24 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4.2 Registration
Your motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national regula-
tions on registration.
Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code sticker in
addition to the EU plate.
4.3 Payload
On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible
(directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving char-
acteristics of the vehicle.
X Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to burst.
You can lose control of the vehicle.
X Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle
documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded
vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects) weighed on a
public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
X Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the
payload is high.
Z Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle
documents by the payload.
Z Built-in accessories and special equipment reduce the payload.
Z Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.
Description Load (kg)
Maximum permitted
payloads
Motorhome roof rack 100
Bike rack Triple 50
Quadruple 60
Motorcycle rack 150
Sliding drawer 40
Rear garage and rear storage space (A5831) 150
Rear garage and rear storage space (A5881, A6971, A6981,
A6991, A7071)
250
Rear garage and rear storage space (all other models) 200
Overcab bed 200
Pull-down bed model I 200
Rear bed 200
Bunk beds 100
Folding beds 50
Before the journey
4
25Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4.3.1 Terms
Maximum permissible
gross weight in a laden
condition
The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that a
vehicle may never exceed.
The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the mass
in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum permis-
sible gross weight in a laden condition.
Permitted mass The permitted mass is the weight specified by the manufacturer for issuing the
type approval. The permitted mass must never exceed the maximum permissible
gross weight of the loaded vehicle.
Mass in ready-to-drive
condition
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive standard
vehicle.
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:
z Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard
equipment
z Driver's weight
z Basic equipment weight
Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been
filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a fuel tank which has been filled
up to 90 %.
75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the driver
really weighs.
Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper
vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:
z Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes)
z Gas bottles filled up to 90 %
z A full heating system
z A full toilet flushing system
z The power cables for the 240 V power supply
z The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used
The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to-drive
conditions.
Z Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight".
However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better
understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for fixed
formulations.
Z All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.
Example for calculating
the basic equipment
Water tank with 120 l 120 kg
Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg
gas
+ 2 x 14 kg
bottle
) + 50 kg
Boiler with 12 l + 12 kg
240 V power cable + 4 kg
Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg
Total = 206 kg
Before the journey
4
26 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Payload The payload is made up as follows:
z Conventional load
z Additional equipment
z Personal equipment
You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the fol-
lowing text.
Conventional load The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the passen-
gers.
Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the man-
ufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The driver's seat
is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and must not be
calculated as part of the conventional load.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.
Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples of
additional equipment include:
z Caravan coupling
z Awning
z Bike or motorcycle rack
z Satellite unit
Chapter 16 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they may
also be obtained from the manufacturer.
Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in the
conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal equip-
ment can include the following:
z Foodstuffs
z Crockery
z Television
z Radio
z Clothes
z Bedding
z Toys
z Books
z Toiletries
No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:
z Animals
z Bikes
z Boats
z Surfboards
z Sports equipment
For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the manufac-
turer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the following
formula:
Z The vehicle's payload can be increased by reducing the weight in a ready-to-
drive condition. To do this, it is allowed for example to empty the fluid con-
tainers or to remove the gas bottles.
Before the journey
4
27Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L
Explanation N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manufac-
turer
L = total length of the vehicle in metres
4.3.2 Calculating the payload
The payload (see section 4.3.1) is the difference in weight between
z Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and
z Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.
The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum permis-
sible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manufacturer
in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value.
Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles and
complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual payload
be determined.
To do this, proceed as follows:
First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and
have it weighed.
Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have it
weighed.
The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the cor-
rect loading of the vehicle (see section 4.3.3). The sum of these values is the current
weight of the vehicle.
The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross
weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight.
X The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive weights.
For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condi-
tion must not be exceeded.
X Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle
documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded
vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects) weighed on a
public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
Mass in kg to be cal-
culated
Calculation
Example for calculating
the payload
Maximum permissible gross weight accord-
ing to vehicle documents
3500
Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condition,
including basic equipment according to ve-
hicle documents
- 3070
This results in a permissible payload of 430
Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each
weighing 75 kg
- 225
Additional equipment - 40
For the personal equipment this results in = 165
Before the journey
4
28 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equipment:
Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for the
actual payload.
The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal equip-
ment.
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly
Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy objects
(e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle is exceeded.
However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circumstances.
That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is stored.
To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a calculator
and some time.
Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the load on
the axles:
Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle
Weight on the rear axle – G = weight on the front axle
Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cm
G = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kg
R = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm
X For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross weight in a
laden condition.
X Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
X Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle loads
specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load-carrying
capacity of the tyres (see chapter 14).
X Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to
the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a
motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the
rear storage space. The release of the front axle negatively affects the driving
quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
X Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip.
X Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles. Low-lying
storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direction of travel
are particularly suited for storing heavy objects.
X Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets.
X Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Z Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front wheel
to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back wheel.
Before the journey
4
29Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Calculating axle loads: Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with the
weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result by the
wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage compartment
on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage compartment.
In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from the
weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value (example 1), this
means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this value. If the result is a
negative value (example 2), this means that the load on the front axle is
increased. Make a note of this value, too.
Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way.
In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle load and
add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from) the front axle
load.
How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in section 4.3.2.
If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be distrib-
uted in a different way.
If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is reduced
(traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive. In this case,
the load must be redistributed, too.
4.3.4 Roof load
Example 1 Example 2
Example calculation
Distance to the front axle A (A1) 450 (cm) (A2) 250 (cm)
Weight in the storage compartment G x 100 (kg) x 50 (kg)
Wheelbase of the vehicle R ÷ 325 (cm) ÷ 325 (cm)
Load on the rear axle
(add to the axle load)
138.5 (kg) 38.5 (kg)
Weight in the storage compartment - 100 (kg) - 50 (kg)
Load relief to the front axle
(subtract from the axle load)
38.5 (kg)
Load on the front axle
(add to the axle load)
-11.5 (kg)
X Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Always use the ladder
at the rear to climb onto the roof.
X Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping when
the ladder is moist or icy.
X Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when the
roof is moist or icy.
X Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate as
the roof load increases.
Z If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the roof
rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes). Special
girder systems are available as accessory. The authorised dealer or service
centre will be happy to advise you.
Z The maximum permissible roof load is 100 kg.
Before the journey
4
30 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Rear ladder
Folding downwards:
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock (Fig. 1,1)
and turn it a quarter turn until the key is in a vertical position.
Hold the foldable part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,4) and swing out the securing
bracket (Fig. 1,5).
Pull out the key and fold the rear ladder downwards.
Folding upwards:
Fold the rear ladder upwards and hold it firmly.
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock (Fig. 1,1).
Swivel the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5) inward around the tube of the fixed part of
the rear ladder (Fig. 1,3).
Turn the key a quarter turn until it is in a horizontal position.
Check the rear ladder lock: Slightly pull on the rear ladder.
4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space
Z The vehicle roof is not suitable for localised load. Before stepping on to the roof,
extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a smooth or
soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel.
Z Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders.
Z Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.
Z The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall height.
This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thoroughfares.
Fig. 1 Rear ladder lock
X Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight
when loading the rear garage/the rear storage space.
X Depending on the model, the maximum permissible load for the rear garage
/ rear storage space is between 150 kg and 250 kg. Do not exceed the permis-
sible rear axle load.
X Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage
space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on the
front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.
Before the journey
4
31Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Moving the clamping eyelets: Turn the clamping eyelet (Fig. 2,1) half a turn in an anticlockwise direction.
Push the clamping eyelet into the clamping rail (Fig. 2,2) to the desired position.
Give clamping eyelet one half turn in a clockwise direction. The clamping eyelet
sits tightly in the clamping rail again.
Check that the clamping eyelet is tight.
4.3.6 Double floor
4.3.7 Sliding drawer
Z Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets are
mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure loads
onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing nets for
securing the load, never rubber expanders.
Z When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed tightly
in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in the
clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements of the
steering wheel or when braking.
Z Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor
covering.
Fig. 2 Clamping eyelets rear garage
1 Clamping eyelet
2 Clamping rail
X Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight
when loading the double floor.
Z Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor
covering.
Z Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
Before the journey
4
32 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4.3.8 Bike rack
Loading the bike rack with
bicycles
When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity of
the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The bike rack
should always be loaded from the inside to the outside.
Loading the bike rack correctly:
Depending on the model, fold the bike rack down or pull it out.
Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall.
Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack.
Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps on the
bike rack.
In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle depending on the model of the bike
rack on the retaining clip or the retaining bracket and to the spacer respectively.
If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as
possible to the rear wall.
4.3.9 Load rack, extendable
X Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight
when loading the bike rack.
X Bicycles may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. Adjust
the attachments for the bikes accordingly.
X Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
X Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the first
10 km and then at each break in the journey.
Z The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered.
Z Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted.
Z Before every journey, check:
Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly?
Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack belts?
X Do not exceed the rear axle load.
X Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to
the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a
motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the
rear storage space. The release of the front axle negatively affects the driving
quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
X Always make sure to store the load roadworthy and secure it against falling.
X The load may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. The
lighting and the official licence plate on the load rack may not be covered by
the load.
X Always push in and secure the load rack after use.
Z The load rack and caravan coupling may not be used simultaneously.
Before the journey
4
33Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The load rack permits transport of a load (e.g. a motor scooter or up to four bicycles)
weighing up to 150 kg.
Different attachments are available to transport the load. Our authorised dealers
and service centres will be happy to advise you.
Pulling out:
Turn the spring latch (Fig. 3,1) on both sides half a turn and allow to engage in
the locking position (Fig. 3).
Pull load rack (Fig. 3,2) out straight as far as it will go.
Turn the spring latch on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage (Fig. 4).
Loosen knurled screws (Fig. 5,2) on both sides.
Fold up lamp holder (Fig. 5,1).
Retighten the knurled screws.
Connect the electrics between the load rack and the vehicle.
Pushing in:
Disconnect the electrics between the load rack and the vehicle.
Loosen knurled screws (Fig. 5,2) on both sides.
Fold in lamp holder (Fig. 5,1).
Retighten the knurled screws.
Turn the spring latch (Fig. 4,2) on both sides half a turn and allow to engage in
the locking position (Fig. 3).
Push load rack (Fig. 4,1) in straight as far as it will go.
Turn the spring latch on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage.
Z The load rack has a EG type approval number.
Z Observe the country-specific regulations.
Z Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 3 Lock on extension, released Fig. 4 Lock on extension, locked
Fig. 5 Lamp holder lock
1 2
Before the journey
4
34 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4.4 Towing
4.5 Entrance step
X Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of accident
and injury!
X No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during posi-
tioning for connecting and detaching.
X Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the towing
vehicle. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The values of
the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the documents of the
vehicle and the caravan coupling.
Z Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the overrun
brake on.
Z Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted incor-
rectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the instruction
manual for the caravan coupling.
X Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey,
ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
X Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being
retracted or extended.
X Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There is a
risk of injury.
X Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the
entrance step.
Z Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is firm
and even when exiting.
Z Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step (see
chapter 12).
Before the journey
4
35Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance step
Pulling out: Pull the entrance step forwards (Fig. 6,2) until it latches into place.
Pushing in:
Slightly lift the entrance step (Fig. 6,1).
Push the entrance step as far as it will go under the base of the vehicle (Fig. 6,3).
Ensure that the entrance step latches in place (Fig. 6,4).
4.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step
Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it (Fig. 7).
Z If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place, a
warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 6 Mechanically operated entrance
step
Z If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place, a
warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Z Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.
Fig. 7 Warning notice for entrance step
O.K.
Before the journey
4
36 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Operating switch The switch to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the vehicle in the
area of the conversion door.
Extending:
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 8,1) down until the entrance step has extended
completely.
Retracting:
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 8,1) up until the entrance step has retracted com-
pletely.
Emergency operation If the electric drive of the entrance step fails, follow the directions below to manu-
ally retract the entrance step:
Pull out the securing splint from the connection to the engine.
Release the rectangular connection to the engine using a suitable object (e.g. a
screwdriver).
Push in the entrance step by hand and secure it using a suitable device (e.g. a
string).
Contact customer service.
4.6 PVC-floor covering
4.7 Television
Fig. 8 Operating switch entrance step
Z Shoes with pointed heels can leave permanent impressions in the PVC-floor
covering. Never wear shoes with pointed heels in the vehicle.
Z Rubber mats or long exposure to ketchup, carrot juice, ink, blood or lipstick can
discolour the PVC-floor covering. If possible, remove stains from the floor imme-
diately.
X Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
X Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen
support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet:
Close TV cabinet.
X Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park position.
Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points towards the
back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.
Z Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from
chapter 7.
Before the journey
4
37Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Storing the television in the TV
cabinet:
Rotate the television to its initial position (Fig. 9) and lock it into place.
Use handle (Fig. 9,1) to push the holder for the flat screen backwards. The latch
(Fig. 9,2) will engage.
Close TV cabinet.
4.8 Snow chains
The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual coun-
tries.
z Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels.
z After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.
Fig. 9 Television (flat screen) Fig. 10 Alternative: Television (flat
screen)
Z Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between the
tyres and the vehicle body.
Z When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are sub-
jected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum
speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely covered with snow.
Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Z Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow chains.
Z Only use snow chains approved by the manufacturer.
Z Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.
Z If the drive axle of the vehicle has twin tyres (2 tyres next to each other), mount
the the snow chains to the outer tyres.
Z In the case of I-model vehicles only fine-linked snow chains may be used.
Before the journey
4
38 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
4.9 Road safety
Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:
X Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure
causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can
lose control of the vehicle.
No. Checks Checked
Base vehicle
1 All vehicle documents are on board
2 Tyres in proper condition
3 Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function
4 Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled
5 Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up
6 Brakes function
7 Brakes react evenly
8 When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane
Housing body, outside
9 Awning completely retracted
10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)
11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away
12 External supports removed
13 Fitted steady legs retracted and fixed in place
14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away
15 Entrance step retracted (observe warning tone)
16 External flaps closed and locked
17 Conversion door locked
18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded
measured and noted. Keep the height information close at hand in
the driver's cabin
Housing body, inside
19 Windows and skylights closed and locked
20 Television secured in the TV cabinet or removed from the support
and stored securely
21 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)
22 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position
23 Open storage spaces empty
24 No gas cartridges or other easily flammable materials stored in the
roof cupboard of the awning light
25 Refrigerator door secured
26 Refrigerator set to 12 V operation
27 All drawers and flaps closed
28 Living area doors and sliding doors secured
29 Pull-down bed secured
Before the journey
4
39Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
30 Swivel seat locking device for driver's seat and front passenger's
seat locked
31 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts
32 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured
Gas system
33 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that they
are unable to turn
34 Protective cap set on top of the gas bottle
35 Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are closed
Electrical system
36 Check the battery voltage of the starter and living area battery (see
chapter 9). If the panel indicates that the battery voltage is too
low, the respective battery will need to be recharged. Observe the
notes and instructions in chapter 9
Z Commence journey with fully charged starter and living
area batteries.
No. Checks Checked
Before the journey
4
40 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
During the journey
5
41Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5During the journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome.
The instructions address the following topics:
z driving speed
z brakes
z seat belts
z seats and headrests
z the backrest adjustment mechanism for the bench
z seating arrangement
z branch block
z electrical window winders
z electrically adjustable external mirrors
z Roman shades in the driver's cabin
z writing and reading rest
z bonnet
z windscreen washer fluid container
z checking the oil level
z filling the tank
5.1 Driving the motorhome
X The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving
technique accordingly.
X Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey,
ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
X During the journey, seat belts should always be worn at the seats that have
seat belts mounted.
X Never open your seat belts when travelling.
X Passengers must remain in the seats provided.
X The doors must remain locked.
X Avoid braking with a jerk.
X If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the vehicle
is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when changing the des-
tination.
X Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the
journey.
Z Drive slowly on poor roads.
Z Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and driving
in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles might swing
out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can cause damage to
the underbody or to parts fitted there.
Z If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed, the
manufacturer will not be responsible for damages caused.
Z The safety measures stipulated in chapter 3 have to be observed.
Z If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically
switched on when driving in reverse gear.
During the journey
5
42 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.2 Driving speed
5.3 Brakes
Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:
z Do the brakes function?
z Do the brakes react evenly?
z Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?
5.4 Seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point safety belts in the living area on
the seats for which seat belts are compulsory by law. National regulations apply
seat-belt fastening.
X The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are suffi-
cient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables a high
maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability.
X The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden crosswind
can be especially dangerous.
X Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.
X Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road conditions
and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of safety, make
sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving situation and
environment.
X Adhere to the national legal speed limits.
X Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an authorised
specialist workshop.
Z Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of varying
strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unservice-
able.
X Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them
fastened during the journey.
X Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an
authorised specialist workshop.
X Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the belt
clips.
X Inspect the screwed connections of the seat belts from time to time in order
to ensure that they are correctly seated.
X Only use one seat belt for one adult person.
X Do not belt in objects together with persons.
X Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In these
cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate.
X Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
During the journey
5
43Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly
The seat belt is fastened correctly when a fist can be passed between the body and
the seat belt.
5.4.2 Adjusting the seat belt correctly
Before setting off, adjust the seat belts so that the shoulder belt passes between
the neck and shoulder joint.
Adjusting the belt guide
downwards:
Firmly press down the belt column (Fig. 11,2) with both hands and then release
it.
The belt column remains at the desired height.
Adjusting the belt guide
upwards:
Press on the marked area (Fig. 11,1) of the cushion.
The lock releases itself. The belt column moves up.
Release the marked area when the desired height is reached.
The belt column remains at the desired height.
5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat
X After an accident, replace the seat belts.
X During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise the
functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.
X Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the
body.
X When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.
Z The seat belts are not adjustable for all models.
Fig. 11 Seat belt, bench
X Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of
travel and lock in position.
X The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not to be
rotated.
Z The driver's and front passenger's seat are a part of the base vehicle, depending
on model and vehicle equipment. In this case the adjustment of the seats is
described in the operating instructions of the base vehicle.
During the journey
5
44 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.5.1 Seats (Aguti)
Rotating seats into driving
position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in position
in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central posi-
tion.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.
Turn the knurled wheel (Fig. 12,2) in an anticlockwise direction (when viewed
from the front). The latch of the armrest is released by this.
Move the armrest to the desired position.
Turn the knurled wheel as far as possible in a clockwise direction.
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
The position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can be adjusted. The han-
dles which are required for this purpose are positioned to the front, right or left of
the seat.
Pull the handle (Fig. 12,1). The seat can be moved forward or backward.
Turn the knurled knob (Fig. 12,4). The angle of the backrest can be adjusted.
Fig. 12 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (Aguti)
1 Lengthways adjustment
2 Armrest adjustment
3 Rotating
4 Backrest adjustment mechanism
Z Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
Z Move the seats all the way down before turning. Otherwise, the seats cannot be
turned.
During the journey
5
45Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Adjusting the seat height Depending on the model, the height of the seat is infinitely adjustable.
Pull the lever (Fig. 13,1) upwards.
Take pressure off or apply pressure to seat. The seat moves up or down.
Release lever when the desired position is reached. The seat is locked.
5.5.2 Seats (ISRI)
Rotating seats into driving
position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in position
in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central posi-
tion.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.
For ease in handling, first move the armrest slightly upward.
For fine adjustments, turn the handwheel (Fig. 14,1) upwards or downwards.
Fig. 13 Seat height adjustment
Fig. 14 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (ISRI)
1 Armrest adjustment
2 Lengthways adjustment
3 Height adjustment
4 Rotating
5 Backrest adjustment mechanism
5
1
2
3
4
Z Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
During the journey
5
46 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
Both the height and the position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can be
adjusted. The handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to the
front, right or left of the seat.
Pull the handle (Fig. 14,2). The seat can be moved forward or backward.
Pull the handle (Fig. 14,5). The angle of the backrest can be adjusted.
Pull the handle (Fig. 14,3). The seat can be lifted or lowered toward the front.
5.6 Headrests
Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 15,1) so that the back of
the head is supported at approximately ear height. Push the headrests upwards or
downwards by hand.
X The backrest is under strong spring tension. If there is no resistance to the
backrest, it quickly moves forward after unlocking.
Z If the backrest quickly moves forward uncontrolled it can damage the seatbelt
lock.
Z The headrests are not adjustable for all models.
Fig. 15 Bench headrests
During the journey
5
47Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism for bench
The inclination of the backrest can be adjusted with the backrest adjustment mech-
anism "Travel Lounge".
Pull or press the bar (Fig. 16,1) under the seat (Fig. 16,3) upwards and hold it in
this position.
Push the seat on the rails (Fig. 16,2) to the desired position or carefully pull it for-
wards as far as it will go.
Let go of the bar and move the seat forwards or backwards slightly until the seat
can be heard to lock into place.
5.8 Seating arrangement
Seats which may be used during travel are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 17).
Z If the vehicle is equipped with the backrest adjustment, the bench cannot be
converted into a bed.
Fig. 16 Backrest adjustment mechanism
for bench
X During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The
authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.
X During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted.
X Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fig. 17 "Seat" symbol
During the journey
5
48 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.9 Branch block (model I)
The sliding regulator (Fig. 18,2) for the branch block (Fig. 18,1) is located on the out-
side left of the dashboard.
Vehicle heating is coupled with room heater by the sliding regulator. Therefore the
windscreen is heated when the vehicle is at a standstill.
During mobile operation, close the branch block (slide the sliding regulator all the
way down) so that the complete power of the vehicle heater can reach to the front
and side panes.
5.10 Electrical window winders (model I)
There is an electrical window winder (Fig. 19) on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Opening:
Press lower part of the switch (Fig. 19,2).
Closing:
Press upper part of the switch (Fig. 19,1).
Fig. 18 Branch block
ruma
1
2
X Remove hands and other objects from the window before closing.
X Even if you leave your vehicle just briefly, remove the ignition key from the
steering lock. Otherwise children may be able to operate the window winder
and injure themselves.
Fig. 19 Switch for electrical window
winder
1
2
During the journey
5
49Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.11 Electrically adjustable external mirrors (model I)
Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with two electrically adjustable
and heated external mirrors. The switches for external mirror adjustment and the
mirror heater are on the dashboard.
Adjusting:
Select the mirror to be adjusted. To do so, turn the rotary switch (Fig. 20,1) to the
left or right.
Adjust the mirror by pressing the switch (Fig. 20,1) in the appropriate direction.
Switching on the heater:
Press the switch (Fig. 20,2). The switch indicator lamp shows it is in operation.
5.12 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front
passenger's window
Securing the Roman shade for
the windscreen:
Use the handle (Fig. 21,2 and Fig. 22,1) to pull the two halves of the Roman
shade for the windscreen outwards as far as they will go.
Push the locking knobs (Fig. 21,1) upward or downward. If the red dot is visible,
the lock is open.
Fig. 20 Switch for electrically adjustable
external mirrors and mirror
heater
1 2
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
X While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window and
front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and secured.
Fig. 21 Lock for the Roman shade of the
windscreen
Fig. 22 Lock for the Roman shade of the
windscreen (model I)
During the journey
5
50 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Securing the Roman shade for
the driver's / front passenger's
window:
On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the handle
(Fig. 23,1) onto the cap. The Roman shade is secured.
5.13 Writing and reading rest
Depending on the model, the motorhome is equipped with a writing and reading
rest (Fig. 24).
5.14 Bonnet
Fig. 23 Locking mechanism for Roman
shades on driver's/front pas-
senger's windows
X During the journey the writing and reading rest must be closed.
Z If there is a passenger airbag, the writing and reading rest is locked so it cannot
be opened.
Fig. 24 Writing and reading rest
X When the bonnet is open, there is a risk of injury in the engine compartment.
X Even if the engine was switched off some time ago, it might still be hot.
Danger of burns!
X Do not work in the engine compartment while the engine is running.
X The bonnet must be kept firmly closed and locked during the journey. After
closing, check whether the lock has engaged. In order to carry this out, pull
on the bonnet.
During the journey
5
51Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.14.1 Model I
Opening: Pull the lever (Fig. 25,1) situated on the left-hand side of the vehicle on the dash-
board. The bonnet opens as far as the safety hook allows.
Reach under the bonnet with one hand and actuate the safety hook (Fig. 26,1).
Do this by reaching behind the plate (Fig. 26,2) and pulling it forward.
Move the bonnet in an arch forwards and upwards.
Closing:
Move the bonnet in an arch downwards and backwards until the latch locks
audibly in place.
Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull on
the bonnet.
5.15 Filliing with washer fluid (model I)
Unlock and open the bonnet.
Remove the lid (Fig. 27,1) from the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
Slowly fill in washer fluid.
Push the lid onto the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
Fig. 25 Release knob on the inside of the
bonnet
Fig. 26 Release knob on the outside of
the bonnet
1
Fig. 27 Washer fluid container filler neck
1
During the journey
5
52 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
5.16 Checking the oil level (model I)
The oil dipstick (Fig. 28,1) is located behind the front crossbeam. The oil dipstick is
marked in red.
5.17 Filling up with diesel
The fuel filler neck is situated on the exterior of the vehicle, at the front left.
Opening:
Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 29,1) and turn it in an anticlockwise
direction.
Remove cap.
Closing:
Place the cap on the fuel filler neck.
Turn key in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap is fastened securely on the fuel filler neck.
Fig. 28 Oil dipstick (I model)
1 Oil dipstick
X No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be
in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of
explosion!
X The cap for the fuel filler neck and for the drinking water filler neck are very
similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.
Z The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".
Fig. 29 Cap for the fuel filler neck
Pitching the motorhome
6
53Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
6Pitching the motorhome
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z handbrake
z entrance step
z wheel chocks
z operation of the supports
z 240 V connection
z refrigerator
6.1 Handbrake
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
6.2 Entrance step
In order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the entrance step.
6.3 Wheel chocks
When parking the vehicle on slopes or inclines use the wheel chocks.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel
chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as
standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding
4 tonnes.
6.4 Supports
6.4.1 General instructions
Z Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle to pre-
vent it from rolling.
Z Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle.
To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for damages or
animal traces after pitching.
Z If there is any risk of frost, release the handbrake every now and then and apply
it again. This will prevent it from freezing or rusting. Prior to releasing the hand-
brake, secure the vehicle so that is cannot roll away.
Z Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for sta-
bilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out.
Z When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded.
Z Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract and
secure them.
Z When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order to pre-
vent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.
Pitching the motorhome
6
54 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
6.4.2 Steady legs (SAWIKO)
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the
steady legs regularly.
The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.
Extending:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 30,1) and rotate until the
steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.
If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 30,4) out
of the support foot extension (Fig. 30,5).
Pull out the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.
Insert the splint in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground
and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 30,1) and rotate until the
steady leg is clear of the ground.
If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 30,4) out
of the support foot extension (Fig. 30,5).
Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 30,5) and insert the splint (Fig. 30,4) in
the drilled hole in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 30,1) until the steady leg has swung upwards
and the guide (Fig. 30,2) has reached the very end of the slot (Fig. 30,3).
Z Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used to
bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for turning.
Fig. 30 Steady leg
Z Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs and
support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the splint?
Pitching the motorhome
6
55Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO)
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the
steady legs regularly.
The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.
Extending:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 31,1) and rotate until the
steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.
Remove the splint (Fig. 31,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5).
Extend the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.
Insert the splint in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground
and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 31,1) and rotate until the
steady leg is clear of the ground.
Remove the splint (Fig. 31,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5).
Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5) and insert the splint (Fig. 31,4) in
the drilled hole in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 31,1) with the socket spanner until the steady leg
has swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 31,3) has completely retracted into
the notch (Fig. 31,2).
6.5 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to a 240 V power supply (see chapter 9).
6.6 Refrigerator
The 12 V operation of the refrigerator is only possible when the vehicle engine is
running. When the vehicle engine is switched off, switch the refrigerator to 240 V
operation or gas operation.
Z Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used to
bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for turning.
Fig. 31 Steady leg
Z Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs and
support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the splint?
Pitching the motorhome
6
56 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Living
7
57Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7Living
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z opening and closing the doors and external flaps
z ventilation of the vehicle
z opening and closing the windows and blinds
z opening and closing the skylights
z rotating the seats
z modifying the table surfaces
z converting tables
z positioning the television
z adjusting the halogen spotlights
z light switches
z extending the seating groups
z use of the beds
7.1 Doors
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 32,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 32,2). The door is open.
X Only drive with locked doors.
Z Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g.
during an accident.
Z Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights. How-
ever, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers to enter
the vehicle.
Z When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.
Z Depending on the model, the locks of the driver's and the front passenger's
doors are part of the base vehicle. In this case, the opening and closing of the
driver's door and the front passenger's door is described in the operating
manual of the base vehicle.
Fig. 32 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
Living
7
58 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Locking: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 32,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (with recessed handle)
Opening:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 33,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 33,2). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 33,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)
Opening:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 34,2) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 34,1). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 34,2) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 33 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
1
2
Fig. 34 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
Living
7
59Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob)
Opening: Turn the knob in an anticlockwise direction (Fig. 35,1). The door lock is
unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the door knob approx. 45° in a clockwise direction (Fig. 35,2) and leave in
this position (Fig. 36).
7.1.5 Conversion door, inside (with locking lever)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 37,1). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever
(Fig. 37,2) jumps out automatically.
Locking:
Press the locking lever (Fig. 37,2).
Fig. 35 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, open
Fig. 36 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, locked
Fig. 37 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
Living
7
60 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 38,1). The door lock is unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the safety knob (Fig. 38,2) in a clockwise direction.
7.1.7 Driver's door, outside
Opening:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 39,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 39,2). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 39,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 38 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
Fig. 39 Door lock of driver's door, out-
side
1
2
Living
7
61Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.1.8 Driver's door, inside
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 40,2). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever
(Fig. 40,1) jumps out automatically.
Locking:
Press the locking lever (Fig. 40,1).
7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be folded out
An insect screen door is integrated in the conversion door. The insect screen door
can be opened outward. In the process the conversion door stays open.
Extending: Fully open the conversion door and fix to the exterior wall.
Depending on the model, turn the latch (Fig. 41,1 or Fig. 42,3) a quarter turn or
push it back.
Open the insect screen door.
Push rail (Fig. 42,1) in the direction of the arrow for stabilisation.
Fully close insect screen door and push latch (Fig. 42,3) in the direction of the
arrow.
Retracting:
Unlatch insect screen door. To do this, push the latch (Fig. 42,3) in the opposite
direction of the arrow.
Open insect screen door.
Push rail (Fig. 42,1) in the opposite direction of the arrow.
Fold in the insect screen door. The latching (Fig. 42,2) engages.
Press the insect screen door on the conversion door and, depending on the
model, (Fig. 41,1 or Fig. 42,3) turn the latch one quarter turn or slide it into the
holder on the frame.
Fig. 40 Door lock of driver's door, inside
1 2
Fig. 41 Insect screen door, closed Fig. 42 Insect screen door, opened out
1
1
22
3
Living
7
62 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion door, extendable
Closing: Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 43,1).
Opening:
Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 43,1).
7.1.11 Window of conversion door (Hartal)
The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.
Closing:
Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 44,2) in the middle of the bar (Fig. 44,1), pull it
upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at
this height.
Opening:
Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the bar and push it down.
Z Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.
Fig. 43 Insect screen
Fig. 44 Roman shade
Living
7
63Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.2 External flaps
The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylinders.
Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle
Opening:
Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 45,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock
is unlatched.
Remove the key.
Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 45,2). The external flap is open.
Closing:
Firmly close the external flap.
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is locked.
Remove the key.
Z Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
Z To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted to the
external flap.
Z When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.
Z To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular
external flap at the same time.
Fig. 45 Flap lock with recessed handle
Living
7
64 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped
Opening:
Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 46,1) and turn a quarter turn in an anticlock-
wise direction. The lock handle (Fig. 46,2) snaps out.
Remove the key.
Turn lock handle one quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. The flap lock is
open.
Closing:
Firmly close the external flap.
Turn lock handle in a clockwise direction until it is horizontal. The flap lock is
now engaged but not locked.
Insert key into locking cylinder.
Press down lock handle with key inserted and turn key a quarter turn in a clock-
wise direction. The lock handle will stay bolted.
Remove the key.
7.3 Ventilation
Z During rain, water can penetrate the opened flap lock. Therefore close the lock
handle.
Fig. 46 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped,
closed
1 2
X The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas
operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a con-
stant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with
forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the
vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside
with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow
and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO
2
levels.
Z Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions, con-
densation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the floor).
Z Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom-shaped
vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).
Living
7
65Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and effi-
cient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation and
resulting mould is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season, a
pleasant living climate is created if heating output, air distribution and ventilation
are synchronized. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dashboard and
set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.
If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, especially
in summer as heat accumulation can occur. Do not only air the interior, but also the
storage compartments which are accessible from the outside. Air the parking place
as well if the vehicle is parked in a closed space (e.g. garage). The occurrence of con-
densation could lead to the formation of mould.
7.4 Windows
Z The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen
or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect
screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order
not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and
allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding
insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman
shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to
the initial position.
Z Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
Z If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sun-
light can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and
the glass window. The window could be damaged. For that reason, close the
blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight.
Z Before commencing the journey, close the windows.
Z Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent moisture
from entering.
Z To open and close the hinged window, open or close all catch levers which are
fitted to the hinged window.
Z When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows.
Z In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a light
condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The glass is
designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the external
temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed acrylic glass
being damaged by condensation.
Living
7
66 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.4.1 Sliding window with lock
Opening: Pull out the lock (Fig. 47,1).
Press handle (Fig. 47,2) and push it forward or backward at the same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as it can go.
Push in the lock.
7.4.2 Sliding window without lock
Opening:
Press handle (Fig. 48,1) and push or pull it forward or backward at the same
time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as possible and let the handle lock in place.
Fig. 47 Sliding window with slide lock
Fig. 48 Sliding window
1
Living
7
67Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges
Opening:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.
Open the hinged window until the required position has been reached and use
knurled knob (Fig. 50,1) to secure in position.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing:
Turn knurled knob (Fig. 50,1) until the latch is released.
Close the hinged window.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The
locking catch (Fig. 49,2) is located on the inside of the window catch (Fig. 49,1).
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in 2 positions:
z "Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 51)
z Firmly closed (Fig. 49)
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.
Lightly open the hinged window outwards.
Return the catch lever to its initial position. The locking catch (Fig. 51,2) has to
be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 51,1).
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
Z When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces.
Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
Fig. 49 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 50 Hinged window with rotary
hinges, open
Fig. 51 Catch lever in the "continuous
ventilation" position
Living
7
68 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged windows
completely.
7.4.4 Hinged window with automatic hinges
Opening:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 52,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.
Open the hinged window to the desired latched position. The automatic hinge
(Fig. 53,1) locks in place automatically.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing: Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases.
Close the hinged window.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 52,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The
locking catch (Fig. 52,2) is located on the inside of the window catch (Fig. 52,1).
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:
z "Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 54)
z Firmly closed (Fig. 52).
Z Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is not
released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of the
window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure.
Z When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces.
Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
Fig. 52 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 53 Hinged window with automatic
hinges, open
Fig. 54 Catch lever in the "continuous
ventilation" position
Living
7
69Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 54,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.
Slightly open the hinged window outwards.
Turn the catch lever a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking
catch (Fig. 54,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 54,1).
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged windows
completely.
7.4.5 Blind and insect screen
The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect
screen are adjusted separately.
Blind The blind is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 55,2) downwards. If the blind is to be completely
closed, it is suspended into the locking devices (Fig. 55,3) situated on both sides
of the window frame.
Opening:
If the blind is completely closed: Press handle (Fig. 55,2) downwards and, at the
same time, tilt it slightly inward. The blind can be taken out of the locking
devices situated on both sides of the window frame.
If the blind is in an intermediate position: Pull the handle (Fig. 55,2) slightly
downwards until the locking device releases.
Use handle to return blind slowly to its initial position.
Z Open blinds before commencing the journey. When the blinds are closed,
vibrations can damage the spring shaft.
Fig. 55 Hinged window
Living
7
70 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 55,1) down and hang it into the locking
devices (Fig. 55,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.
Opening:
Press handle (Fig. 55,1) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward.
The insect screen can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides
of the window frame.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen
Roman shade The Roman shade (Fig. 56,3) is permanently connected to the insect screen
(Fig. 56,1).
Closing:
Hold the Roman shade in the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 56,4) and carefully
draw it downwards.
Release the Roman shade at the desired position. The Roman shade will stay in
that position.
Opening:
Slowly return the Roman shade to its initial position with the bottom rod
(Fig. 56,4).
Insect screen The insect screen is permanently connected to the Roman shade. When the insect
screen is opened, the Roman shade is opened along with it.
Closing:
Hold the insect screen at the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 56,2) and carefully
pull it downward as far as it goes.
Opening:
Slowly return the insect screen on the bottom rod of the Roman shade
(Fig. 56,4).
Fig. 56 Sunroof
Living
7
71Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front
passenger's window
Closing:
On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs (Fig. 57,1)
upwards or downwards. If the red dot is visible, the lock is open.
Grasp the handle (Fig. 57,2 and Fig. 58,2) of the Roman shades and draw care-
fully until the magnetic catch keeps the Roman shades closed.
Opening:
Using the handle, carefully push back the Roman shades.
On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs upwards or
downwards. As long as the red dot is visible, the lock is open.
On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the handle
(Fig. 58,2) onto the cap (Fig. 58,1). The Roman shade is secured.
7.5 Skylights
Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted to
the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced ventilation is
performed using mushroom-shaped vents.
Fig. 57 Roman shade for the windscreen Fig. 58 Roman shades for driver's
window and front passenger's
window
X The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never cover
or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep
forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.
Z The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen
or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect
screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order
not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and
allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding
insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman
shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to
the initial position.
Z Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
Z If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sun-
light can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and
the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/
Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight slightly
or move it to ventilation position.
Living
7
72 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1)
Depending on the model, there is a skylight built in with forced ventilation
(Fig. 59,1) in the living area and in the toilet compartment.
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 60,2).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 60,1) downward.
Push the spring-loaded latch (Fig. 61,2) towards the inside of the skylight. At the
same time use the handle (Fig. 61,1) to press the skylight upwards.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 60,1) until it latches in place.
Z Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent moisture
from entering.
Z Do not climb on the skylights.
Z Before commencing the journey, close the skylights.
Z Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and locked.
Z Before commencing the journey, open the blinds or Roman shades.
Z Apply talc to the rubber seals of the skylights at least once a year.
Z When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.
Fig. 59 Forced ventilation
Fig. 60 Insect screen Fig. 61 Skylight, handle
Living
7
73Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Closing: Pull on the handle (Fig. 60,2).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 60,1) downward.
Using both handles (Fig. 61,1), pull down the skylight with force until the two
snap latches lock into place.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 60,1) until it latches in place.
Blind To close and open the blind:
Closing:
Pull the blind (Fig. 62,1) using the handle (Fig. 62,2) and hook the hooks
(Fig. 62,3) in the opening (Fig. 62,4).
Opening:
Pull the hooks (Fig. 62,3) out of the opening (Fig. 62,4) and guide the blind back.
7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2)
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 63,2) with the handle (Fig. 63,1). The insect
screen folds down.
Press the skylight up using both handles (Fig. 63,3).
Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 63,4).
Closing:
Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 63,2) with the handle (Fig. 63,1). The insect
screen folds down.
Pull down the skylight with force using both handles (Fig. 63,3).
Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 63,4).
Fig. 62 Blind
Fig. 63 Skylight with snap latch
(variant 2)
1
4
3
2
3
Living
7
74 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.5.3 Heki skylight (mini and midi)
The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.
Opening:
Press the safety knob (Fig. 64,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar (Fig. 65,1) in the guides (Fig. 65,2) to the rearmost position
(Fig. 65,3).
Closing:
Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 65,1) slightly upwards.
Push the bar back in the guides.
Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob
(Fig. 64,2).
Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position
(Fig. 66,1) and central position (Fig. 66,2). Depending on the model, the skylight
can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 67,1).
Press the safety knob (Fig. 64,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 64,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 65,2) to the desired position.
Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 66,1 or 2) and
lock if necessary.
Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position. The
Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Fig. 64 Safety knob on the Heki skylight Fig. 65 Heki skylight, guide
Fig. 66 Heki skylight in ventilation posi-
tion
Fig. 67 Ventilation position locking
mechanism
Living
7
75Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:
Closing:
Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman shade.
Opening:
Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.5.4 Wind-up skylight
The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.
Opening:
Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 68,2) until a resistance can be felt (max. opening
angle 70°).
Closing:
Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up skylight
can be locked after rotating two or three more times.
Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the acrylic
glass.
Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman shade is
locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along on closing the
Roman shade.
Closing:
Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3) and release in the desired posi-
tion. The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also moved
along on closing the insect screen.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 68,1) to the opposite handle of the Roman
shade (Fig. 68,3) and allow to engage.
Opening:
Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 68,1) at the back upwards and detach
the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 68,3).
Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.
Fig. 68 Wind-up skylight
Living
7
76 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.6 Rotating seats
Depending on the model, the lever for turning the seats is located at the front of
the seat or on the left or right side.
Turning:
Push both armrests at the driver's/front passenger's seat upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central posi-
tion.
Push or pull the lever (Fig. 69,3 or Fig. 70,4) to turn the seat. The seat is released
from the locking device.
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in position
in the direction of travel.
7.7 Tables
7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg
The suspension table size can be enlarged by inserting a table-top extension.
X Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of
travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain
locked in place in the direction of travel.
Z Setting the position of the seats and armrests is described in chapter 5.
Z Move the seats all the way down before turning. Otherwise, the seats cannot be
turned.
Fig. 69 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (Aguti)
Fig. 70 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (ISRI)
5
1
2
3
4
Z Depending on the model, different table-top extensions and fold-out legs are
used. Therefore the table can deviate from the type shown here. The principle
of the conversion is the same for all tables.
Fig. 71 Extend suspension table
Living
7
77Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Extending: Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 71,2).
Lift the table-top slightly and pull out it out as far as possible. The table exten-
sion (Fig. 71,1) is fully extended.
Set down the table.
Insert the table-top extension in the table extension.
Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Reducing size:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 71,2).
Slightly lift the front of the table-top and pull out.
Remove the table-top extension and store it securely.
Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible. The table extension
(Fig. 71,1) is fully retracted.
Set down the table.
Tighten the knurled screws.
The table's fold-out leg enables it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed foundation:
Lift the front of the table-top (Fig. 72,1) by approx. 45°.
Fold the lower part of the fold-out leg (Fig. 72,3) by 90°. Depending on the
model, pull the lower part of the fold-out leg down or push the release knob.
Press the release knob on the lock (Fig. 72,4).
Swivel the table-top approx. 45° upward and remove the table from the
retainer.
Depending on the model, insert both additional support legs (Fig. 72,2) into the
holders (Fig. 72,5) on the bottom side of the table.
Insert the table into the lower retainer and lock it.
Fig. 72 Bed foundation
Living
7
78 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.7.2 Suspension table (bar seating group)
The suspension table size can be enlarged by pulling out a table-top extension.
Extending:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 73,1).
Pull out the table-top extension (Fig. 73,2) as far as possible (Fig. 74).
Guide table-top extension (Fig. 74,1) upwards in a circular movement. The
table-top extension lies flush with the table-top.
Reducing size:
Pull table-top extension (Fig. 74,1) away from the table-top as far as it will go
and press downwards against the resistance of the retaining springs. The table-
top extension moves downwards in a circular movement (Fig. 74).
Push in the table-top extension as far as it will go.
Tighten knurled screw (Fig. 73,1).
The table's fold-out leg enables it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed foundation:
Slightly raise the front of the table-top (Fig. 75,1).
Unlock table leg (Fig. 75,3) at the hinge and fold it in.
Push the table-top approx. 45° upwards and remove holders (Fig. 75,4) from the
upper mounting rail.
Depending on the model, insert both additional support legs (Fig. 75,2) into the
holders (Fig. 75,5) on the bottom side of the table.
Attach suspension table to the lower mounting rail and rest it onto the table leg
hinge.
Fig. 73 Lock for table-top extension Fig. 74 Table-top extension
12
1
Fig. 75 Bed foundation
Living
7
79Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.7.3 Swivel table for the round seating group
Fastening to the floor:
Place the swivel table next to the holder (Fig. 76,3) or on the holder (Fig. 77,2).
Place the bar (Fig. 76,2) with the securing bolt (Fig. 76,1) over the table leg.
Move the bar and possibly also the swivel table in such a way that the securing
bolt (Fig. 76,1 or Fig. 77,1) can be screwed into the holder (Fig. 76,3 or Fig. 77,2).
Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.
7.7.4 Fixed table (movable table-top)
The top of the fixed table can be moved both lengthways and crossways.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 78,1).
Move table-top (Fig. 78,2) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
Moving in a crossways
direction:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 78,3).
Move table-top (Fig. 78,2) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.
X Before commencing the journey, reduce the size of the swivel table and
secure it.
Fig. 76 Lock for swivel table with clamp Fig. 77 Lock for swivel table without
clamp
1
2
3
2
1
Fig. 78 Fixed table
Living
7
80 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.7.5 Fixed table
Fastening to the floor:
Place the fixed table with the perforated plate (Fig. 79,2) on to the holder
(Fig. 79,3).
Move the fixed table in such a way that the securing bolt (Fig. 79,1) can be
screwed into the holder (Fig. 79,3).
Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.
The table-top of the fixed table can be moved lengthways or folded to the side.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 80,2 and 3).
Shift the table-top.
Lock the table-top with the fixing screws.
Folding the table-top to the
side:
Remove the fixing screw (Fig. 80,1).
Fold the table-top to the side.
X Lock the fixed table in position before commencing the journey.
Fig. 79 Locking mechanism for fixed
table
1
3
2
Fig. 80 Fixed table (from below)
1
23
Living
7
81Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Depending on the model, the table top of the fixed table can be enlarged.
Extending:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 80,2 and 3).
Pull the table top apart.
Insert the table-top extension (Fig. 81,1).
Push the table top back together.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Reducing size:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 80,2 and 3).
Pull the table top apart.
Remove the table-top extension (Fig. 81,1) and store it securely.
Push the table top back together.
Tighten the knurled screws.
7.7.6 Lift-off table for the round seating group
The lift-off table's lifting mechanism permits it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed foundation:
Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 82,2) to the left. The lock is open.
Press the table-top (Fig. 82,1) in the middle downwards to the desired stop limit
(Fig. 82,3 or 4) and hold it down.
Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 82,2) to the right. The lift-off table is locked.
Fig. 81 Extending the fixed table
1
Z The lift-off table is not secured to the floor. Before the journey, lower the lift-off
table to the top limit and secure to the benches with the straps provided.
Fig. 82 Lift-off table for the round
seating group
4
3
2
1
Living
7
82 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.8 Television
Flat screen in the TV cabinet The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.
Pulling the television console
forward:
Press the release knob (Fig. 83,5) and pull the holder for the flat screen forward
as far as possible by the handle (Fig. 83,4).
Swivelling the television
console:
Pull the release knob (Fig. 83,1) and swivel flat screen (Fig. 83,2) to the desired
position.
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 83,3).
Set the desired angle for the flat screen and re-tighten the knurled screw.
Flat screen with jointed arm The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.
Positioning the flat screen with
jointed arm:
Pull on the fabric strip (Fig. 84,3) to unlock the jointed arm (Fig. 84,2).
Swivel flat screen (Fig. 84,1) into the required position.
Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and set
the desired angle of inclination.
X Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
X Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen
support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet:
Close TV cabinet.
X Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park position.
Danger of accidents!
Fig. 83 TV cabinet
Fig. 84 Flat screen with jointed arm
Living
7
83Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.9 Lamps
Turning spotlight: Grasp the housing (Fig. 85,2) and turn it.
The housing can be turned in different directions:
z To the left and to the right
z Up and down
Shifting spotlight:
Grasp the holder (Fig. 85,1).
Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.
7.10 Light switch
Depending on the model, there is a light switch for lighting the entrance at the
bottom of the entrance area (Fig. 86,1).
X Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot.
X Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching them.
X If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety distance
of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
Fig. 85 Spotlight
Z The light switches have different layouts according to the model. The light
switches are located either directly on the corresponding lamp or next to the
lamp, e.g. in the vicinity of the seating group.
Fig. 86 Light switch for lighting
entrance
1
Living
7
84 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.11 Extending the seating group
7.11.1 Extending the central seating group
Extend the table (Fig. 87,3) (see section 7.7).
Pull on the handle (Fig. 87,8) and open the flap (Fig. 87,4).
Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 88,7) and wedge together with the flap
(Fig. 88,4).
Place the back cushions (Fig. 88,1) and the seat cushions (Fig. 88,2) on the
bench seat extension.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 88,6) between the seat cushions and the
exterior wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 88,5) between the back cushions and the
exterior wall.
7.12 Beds
7.12.1 Overcab bed
Fig. 87 Before extending
Fig. 88 After extending
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Flap
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion
7 Bench seat extension
8 Handle
X The maximum permitted overcab bed load is 200 kg.
X Only use the overcab bed, if the safety net is set up.
X Never allow small children to remain in the overcab bed without supervision.
X But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users
should ensure that they cannot fall out of the overcab bed.
X Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Z Do not load the overcab bed without mattress. The plastic mould part can
break!
Living
7
85Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Access ladder Always use the access ladder (Fig. 89,4) provided as standard to access the overcab
bed.
Attaching:
Attach the ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 89,5) on the alcove panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 89,3) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted
frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the alcove.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 89,1) to the holders on the ceiling (Fig. 89,2).
Folding mechanism Depending on the model, the overcab bed can be folded upwards. This simplifies
passage from driver's cabin to living area.
Folding upwards:
Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Fold the front of the overcab bed (Fig. 90,1) upwards. The overcab bed is kept
in the upper position by gas-pressure springs.
Folding downwards:
Pull overcab bed downwards.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
Fig. 89 Overcab bed
2
4
3
1
2
1
5
Fig. 90 Overcab bed, folded upwards
1
Living
7
86 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I)
Preparing the driver's cabin Depending on equipment, the driver's and front passenger's seats have to be
adjusted in different ways before lowering the pull-down bed.
Variant 1 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are not equipped with headrests (no safety package).
Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat to the direction of vehicle
travel, lock them in place and move them backwards.
Fold the backrest back.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Variant 2 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on driver's and
front passenger's seats can be removed.
Remove the headrests.
Turn the driver's seat to the direction of travel, lock it in place and move it back-
wards.
Fold the backrest of the passenger's seat back.
Push the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the backrest back completely.
Turn the front passenger's seat in the opposite direction to the direction of
travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
X The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
X The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage. When the
bed is not being used, only place the bed linen which is required for two per-
sons in it.
X Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed to the roof using
the retaining belt. Tighten the retaining belt firmly.
X Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.
X Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without supervi-
sion.
X But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users
should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
X Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
X Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when
the bed is lowered. Fire hazard!
X Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is pushed
up. Fire hazard!
X Depending on the seat model, the backrest is under strong spring tension. If
there is no resistance to the backrest in these seats, it quickly moves forward
after unlocking.
Living
7
87Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Variant 3 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on driver's and
front passenger's seats can not be removed.
Push the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the back-
rest back completely.
Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat in the opposite direction to
the direction of travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered completely.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Lowering the pull-down bed:
Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed.
Undo the retaining belt (Fig. 91,5) at the roof (Fig. 91,2).
Swing the pull-down bed down in a circle until it locks into place audibly.
Folding the pull-down bed up:
Switch off the reading lamps on the ceiling above the pull-down bed.
Loosen the retaining straps of the safety net and lay the safety net under the
mattress.
Use both hands to push the pull-down bed upwards.
Secure the pull-down bed to the roof (Fig. 91,2) by means of the retaining belt
(Fig. 91,5).
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down bed.
Hook the access ladder to the pull-down bed by attaching both brackets into
the U-bolts (Fig. 91,4).
Safety net The safety net is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame. Only
use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 91,1) to the holders (Fig. 91,3) on the ceiling.
Fig. 91 Pull-down bed
4 4
Living
7
88 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.12.3 Pull-down bed (model T)
The pull-down bed is located above the front seating group.
Opening the pull-down bed:
Switch off the lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed.
Solve the safety belt (Fig. 92,1).
With both hands, pull the pull-down bed down as far as it will go.
Closing the pull-down bed:
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed.
Loosen the retaining straps of the safety net and lay the safety net under the
mattress.
Use both hands to push pull-down bed upwards as far as it will go.
Attach the safety belt (Fig. 92,1).
X The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
X The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage. When the
bed is not being used, only place the bed linen which is required for two per-
sons in it.
X Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed. To do this, lock
the pull-down bed.
X Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.
X Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without supervi-
sion.
X But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users
should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
X Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
X Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when
the bed is lowered. Fire hazard!
X Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is pushed
up. Fire hazard!
Fig. 92 Catch lever
1
Living
7
89Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down bed.
Hook the access ladder to the pull-down bed by attaching both brackets into
the U-bolts (Fig. 93,1).
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 94,2) with the retaining straps is stowed under the mattress.
Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 94,1) to the holders on the ceiling.
7.12.4 Bunk bed
Depending on the model, the rear area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed can
also be used as a rear garage.
Converting the bunk bed into
the rear garage:
Pull on the loop (Fig. 95,3) and release the latch (Fig. 95,1).
Pull the slatted frame (Fig. 95,2) together with the mattress forward until it
latches in place.
Fig. 93 Access ladder holder Fig. 94 Safety net holder
X The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.
X Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.
X Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.
X But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users
should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.
X Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Fig. 95 Bunk bed (rear)
Living
7
90 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.
Attaching:
Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 96,3) on the panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 96,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted
frame. Do not use the safety net until the person is already in bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 96,2) to the holders on the ceiling.
7.12.5 Bunk bed (side)
Depending on the model, the side area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed can
also be used as a storage area.
Converting the storage area to
a bunk bed:
Open the storage flap and fold out the support leg (Fig. 97,2) under the bed.
Pull the loop (Fig. 97,1) and tilt the bed (Fig. 97,3) downwards.
Take the mattress (Fig. 98,3) off the top bed and place it on the bottom bed.
Fig. 96 Safety net
X The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.
X Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.
X Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.
X But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users
should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.
X Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Z Remove the mattress from the bottom bed and put it on the top bed before
converting the bunk bed into a storage compartment.
Fig. 97 Supports and unlocking device Fig. 98 Bunk bed (side)
1
2
3
4
Living
7
91Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.
Attaching:
Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 98,4) on the panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 98,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted
frame. Do not use the safety net until the persons are already in bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 98,2) to the holders on the ceiling.
7.12.6 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)
A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to place
items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside of the vehicle.
Opening:
Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 99,1) hold the slatted frame
open.
Closing:
Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pressure
springs.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
7.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping
Fig. 99 Fixed bed
X In the event of an accident, emergency braking or on uneven road surfaces,
additional cushions with reinforced undersides can be thrown through the
vehicle and injure the occupants of the vehicle. Before setting off, stow the
additional cushions safely away or secure them with the straps.
Z Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and posi-
tion to the one shown here.
Z Depending on the model, an enclosed additional cushion must be inserted
between the seat cushions.
Living
7
92 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.1 Central seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 100,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Depending on the model, insert the bar (Fig. 100,4) or pull it inwards. The bar is
correctly positioned if it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm behind the
table leg.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 101,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 101,1) between the seat cushions and the wall.
Fig. 100 Prior to conversion
Fig. 101 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Bar
5 Mounting rail
Z Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 101,1) an
additional cushion must be inserted.
Living
7
93Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.2 Central seating group with extension
Extend the table (Fig. 102,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Insert the bar (Fig. 102,7) or pull it inwards. The bar is correctly positioned if it
supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm behind the table leg.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 102,8) and open the flap (Fig. 102,5).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 103,6) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 104,2) forwards and to the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 104,1) between the seat cushions and the wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 104,9) between the back cushions and the
wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 104,10) between the seat cushions and the
wall.
Fig. 102 Prior to conversion
Fig. 103 During conversion
Fig. 104 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Mounting rail
5 Flap
6 Bench seat extension
7 Bar
8 Handle
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
Z Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 104,1) and
the second additional cushion (Fig. 104,9) two smaller additional cushions must
be inserted.
Living
7
94 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.3 Facing seating unit with extension
Extend the table (Fig. 105,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 105,1) and lay it aside.
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 105,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 106,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 107,2 and 4) forward and to the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 107,5) between the seat cushion and the wall.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 107,8) between the seat cushion and the wall.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 107,9, 10 and 11) between the cushions on
the table and the seat base and the wall.
Fig. 105 Prior to conversion
Fig. 106 During conversion
Fig. 107 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Back cushion
6 Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
Living
7
95Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.4 Central seating group with divan
Convert the central seating group for sleeping (see section 7.13.2).
Pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 109,3).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 110,2) to the central seating group.
Remove the additional cushion (Fig. 110,1) from the back cushion (Fig. 109,4).
The additional cushion is fixed to the back cushion with Velcro and can easily be
separated.
Lay the back cushion aside.
Insert the additional cushion between the seat cushions and the exterior wall.
Fig. 108 Prior to conversion
Fig. 109 During conversion
Fig. 110 After conversion
1 Additional cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Slatted frame
4 Back cushion
Z For model A 5831 a small additional cushion must be inserted on the divan
behind the front passenger's seat.
Living
7
96 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.5 Round seating group (without slatted frame)
Convert the table (Fig. 111,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 112,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 112,1) between the seat cushions and the exterior
wall.
Remove the back cushions (Fig. 112,4 and 5) and lay them aside.
Fig. 111 Prior to conversion
Fig. 112 During conversion
Fig. 113 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Back cushion
Living
7
97Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.6 Round seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 114,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 115,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 115,1) between the seat cushions and the exterior
wall.
Remove the back cushions (Fig. 115,4) and lay them aside.
Fig. 114 Prior to conversion
Fig. 115 During conversion
Fig. 116 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
Living
7
98 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.7 Front bench seat
Turn the driver's seat (Fig. 117,4) and push it all the way forward.
Convert the table (Fig. 117,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Variant 1
If the vehicle has a guest bed foundation (Fig. 118,6), remove the back cushion
(Fig. 117,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 117,2) and lay them aside.
Depending on the model, lay the included guest bed foundation (Fig. 118,6)
onto the table. Lay the front edge of the guest bed foundation directly against
the driver's seat or the brace on the driver's cabin.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 118,5) on the driver's seat.
Place the seat cushion (Fig. 118,2) on the table.
Insert the back cushion (Fig. 118,1) between the seat cushion and the rear wall.
Observe the wedged form.
Variant 2
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 119,5) on the driver's seat.
Place the seat cushion (Fig. 119,2) on the table.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 119,7) between the seat cushion and the rear
wall.
Both variants
Push back the driver's seat (Fig. 118,4 or Fig. 119,4) again.
Fig. 117 Prior to conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Driver's seat
5 Additional cushion
6 Guest bed foundation
7 Additional cushion
Fig. 118 After conversion (variant 1) Fig. 119 After conversion (variant 2)
Z If sport seats are fitted in the vehicle: Place a seat wedge on the driver's seat
before putting on the additional cushion.
Living
7
99Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan
Extend the table (Fig. 120,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 120,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 121,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 121,2) of the divan into the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 121,1) of the divan between the seat cushion and
the wall.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 121,5) forwards onto the table.
Variant 1
Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 122,4) and pull it into the middle.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 122,8) between the back cushion (Fig. 122,4)
and the seat cushion (Fig. 122,5).
Variant 2
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 121,4) and lay it aside.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 123,10 and 11) between the seat cushion
(Fig. 123,5) and the wall.
Both variants
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 122,9 or Fig. 123,9) between the back cushion
(Fig. 122,1 or Fig. 123,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 122,2 or Fig. 123,2).
Fig. 120 Prior to conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Seat cushion
6 Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
Fig. 121 During conversion
Fig. 122 After conversion (variant 1) Fig. 123 After conversion (variant 2)
Living
7
100 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.9 Front bench seat with divan (extendable)
Extend the table (Fig. 124,4) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 124,7).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 125,8) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull out the bedding box extension (Fig. 125,3).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 125,2) of the divan into the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 125,1) of the divan between the seat cushion and
the wall.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 125,6) forwards onto the table.
Variant 1
Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 126,5) and pull it into the middle.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 126,9) between the back cushion (Fig. 126,5)
and the seat cushion (Fig. 126,6).
Variant 2
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 125,5) and lay it aside.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 127,11 and 12) between the seat cushion
(Fig. 127,6) and the rear wall.
Both variants
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 126,10 or Fig. 127,10) between the back
cushion (Fig. 126,1 or Fig. 127,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 126,2 or Fig. 127,2).
Fig. 124 Prior to conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Bedding box extension
4 Table
5 Back cushion
6 Seat cushion
7 Flap
8 Bench seat extension
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
12 Additional cushion
Fig. 125 During conversion
Fig. 126 After conversion (variant 1) Fig. 127 After conversion (variant 2)
Living
7
101Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.10 Front bench seat with lengthwise seat
Extend the table (Fig. 128,3) and convert the extended suspension table into a
bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 128,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 129,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Remove the back cushion of the lengthwise seat (Fig. 129,1) and lay it aside.
Pull the seat cushion of the lengthwise seat (Fig. 129,2) forwards as far as the
table.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 130,8) between the seat cushion of the
lengthwise seat and the rear wall.
Pull the seat cushion of the bench (Fig. 129,5) forwards onto the table.
Fold over the back cushion of the seat bench (Fig. 129,4) and pull it onto the
seat bench extension.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 129,9) between the seat cushion and the back
cushion.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 129,10, 11 and 12) between the side wall and
the cushions on the table and the seat base.
Fig. 128 Prior to conversion
Fig. 129 During conversion
Fig. 130 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Seat cushion
6 Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
12 Additional cushion
Living
7
102 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.11 Front seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 131,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 132,2 and 4) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 132,1 and 5) between the seat cushions and the
exterior wall.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 133,6) between the seat cushions (Fig. 133,2
and 4).
Fig. 131 Prior to conversion
Fig. 132 During conversion
Fig. 133 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Back cushion
6 Additional cushion
Living
7
103Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.12 L-seating group
Turn the driver's seat and push it all the way up.
Convert the table (Fig. 134,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Fold up and support the table top.
Pull the handle and open the flap of the seat bench extension.
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 135,6) and wedge it with the flap.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 136,7) on the table.
Lay the seat cushions (Fig. 136,4 and 5) onto the table behind the additional
cushion.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 136,2) forwards.
Insert the back cushion (Fig. 136,1) between the seat cushion and the rear wall.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 136,8 and 9) between the side wall and the
cushions on the table and the seat base.
Push back the driver's seat as a retainer.
Fig. 134 Prior to conversion
Fig. 135 During conversion
Fig. 136 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Seat cushion
6 Bench seat extension
7 Additional cushion
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
Living
7
104 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
7.13.13 Individual seats
Remove the back cushions of the individual seats (Fig. 137,4) and lay them
aside.
Attach the attachable boards for the divan extension (Fig. 138,6) and place on
the corresponding cushions (Fig. 138,7 and 8).
Convert the table (Fig. 138,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Fold up and support the table top.
Pull the handles and open the flap (Fig. 138,9) of the bench seat extensions.
Fold up the bench seat extensions (Fig. 138,10) and wedge them with the flaps.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 139,2) of the divans into the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 139,1) of the divans between the seat cushions
and the exterior wall.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 139,8) of the divan extension into the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 139,7) of the divan extension between the seat
cushions and the exterior walls.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 139,11) onto the table between the seat cush-
ions.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 139,12) on the bench seat extensions.
Fig. 137 Prior to conversion
Fig. 138 During conversion
Fig. 139 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Seat cushion
6 Divan extension
7 Back cushion
8 Seat cushion
9 Flap
10 Bench seat extension
11 Additional cushion
12 Additional cushion
Gas system
8
105Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
8Gas system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z safety
z gas consumption
z changing the gas bottles
z gas isolator taps
z hose break guard
z external gas connection
z automatic switching facility
The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in
chapter 10.
8.1 General
X Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas
equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap
on the gas bottle.
X No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be
in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of
explosion!
X Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces (e.g.
garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
X Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an authorised
specialist workshop.
X Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have
the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
X The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected.
The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The
vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is carried out.
X In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there
is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle immediately.
Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
X If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames,
and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
X Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open
windows or the skylight.
X Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
X If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas iso-
lator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas iso-
lator tap.
X Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.
X The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane
gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas
devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
Gas system
8
106 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
8.2 Gas bottles
X Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas gas-
ifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane
gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
X Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tight-
ness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the
gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist workshop no later than
ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must
see to it that the parts are replaced.
X Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space
which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced
ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.
X Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-
proof.
X Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this,
lock the compartment.
X The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
X Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed
for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
X The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the
vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence
of damage.
X Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and
fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust
pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and
ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.
X Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle com-
partment.
X Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
X Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
X If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protec-
tive cap on top.
X Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regulator or
gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
X The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a suit-
able gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
X Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for
vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot
meet the demanding requirements.
X Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 °C.
X Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check
valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in excep-
tional cases with a safety valve.
X Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles.
X Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
Gas system
8
107Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
8.3 Gas consumption
Example A full 11 kg gas bottle is sufficient to:
z Cook for 3 days using one flame,
z Heat for 22 hours on full output or
z Cool for 25 days.
8.4 Changing gas bottles
Z With some models, the gas bottle compartment is located right next to the con-
version door. With these models, only open the gas bottle compartment when
the conversion door is closed. Danger from damages.
Z For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar.
Z Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle
valve.
The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle down to
the operating pressure of the gas devices.
Z For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe the accessories shops have
corresponding Euro filling sets and Euro bottle sets.
Z Information available at the dealers or service centre.
Z For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.
Z The data about gas consumption of the individual gas devices is standard
average values.
Appliances Gas consumption in grams/hour
Heater Approx. 170 - 490 g/h
Cooker, per cooker Approx. 140 - 165 g/h
Refrigerator Approx. 18 g/h
X When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
X When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at the
connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray the rele-
vant connection point or union. These agents are available at the accessories
shop.
Gas system
8
108 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Depending on the model, the gas bottle holder can be pulled out of the gas bottle
compartment:
Open external gas bottle compartment (see section 7.2).
If there is a guard plate (Fig. 140,1), fold it down.
Unlock the slide (Fig. 140,3) using the handle (Fig. 140,2).
Pull out the slide (Fig. 140,3) as far as possible.
Turn back the handle (Fig. 140,2).
Close the regulator tap (Fig. 141,4) on the gas bottle. Pay attention to the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Unscrew the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 141,2) from the gas bottle at the hex-
agon nut (Fig. 141,3).
Remove the gas pressure regulator and the gas tube (Fig. 141,1) from the gas
bottle.
Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle.
Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment.
Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts.
Position the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 141,2) and the gas tube (Fig. 141,1) on
the gas bottle and screw in tightly to the gas bottle at the hexagonal nut
(Fig. 141,3).
Unlock the slide (Fig. 140,3) using the handle (Fig. 140,2).
Push in the slide (Fig. 140,3) as far as possible, and turn back the handle
(Fig. 140,2).
If there is a guard plate (Fig. 140,1), fold it up.
Close the external flap (see section 7.2).
Fig. 140 Gas bottle compartment Fig. 141 Gas bottle connection
Gas system
8
109Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
8.5 Gas isolator taps
A gas isolator tap (Fig. 142) for every gas device is built into the vehicle.
The gas isolator taps can be found on the front of the cooker.
8.6 Hose break guard (crash protection unit)
The crash protection unit protects against unwanted gas discharge. In the event of
an accident or a too high angle of the vehicle the gas supply will automatically be
interrupted.
Construction of the unit The crash protection unit consists of a control unit, an electrical valve and the oper-
ating unit with a tricoloured LED.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 143). The
regulator taps on the gas bottles must be opened manually.
The indicator lamp on the operating unit shows the condition of the gas system.
The system is okay when the indicator lamp (Fig. 143,1) lights up green. When the
indicator lamp lights up or flashes red a fault has occurred. The gas supply is inter-
rupted.
Putting into operation:
Open regulator taps on the gas bottles.
Switch on the system at the operating unit (Fig. 143).
For this, set the rocker switch (Fig. 143,2) to "I". The indicator lamp (Fig. 143,1)
flashes yellow (system test) and lights up green.
Fig. 142 Symbols for the gas isolator taps
1 Refrigerator
2 Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4 Oven
Z When the vehicle is equipped with the Crash-Protection-Unit the living area
heater may be operated during the journey.
Z Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 143 Operating unit
Gas system
8
110 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching off: Set the rocker switch (Fig. 143,2) to "O". The indicator lamp (Fig. 143,1) goes out.
Close regulator taps on the gas bottles.
8.7 External gas connection
The external gas connection (Fig. 144) is located at the rear or to the left or right of
the vehicle depending on the model.
Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 144,2).
Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 144,1).
8.8 Duomatic switching facility
X If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator tap.
X Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the
external gas connection.
X Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an operation
pressure of 30 mbar.
X Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap, make
sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a leak in the
external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air. Immediately close
the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Have the external
gas connection checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
X When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is nothing
near the external gas connection that could cause a spark.
X Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the infor-
mation stickers on the external gas connection.
Fig. 144 External gas connection, gas iso-
lator tap closed
1
2
X Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
Z If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching facility
is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Z Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Gas system
8
111Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The Duomatic is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-
bottle gas system. The Duomatic switching facility automatically switches gas
supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle
is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still con-
tinue operation. The Duomatic switching facility is suitable for all commercial gas
bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
Construction of the unit The Duomatic switching facility consists of a central regulator (Fig. 145,3) and a
switching regulator (Fig. 145,5). The knob (Fig. 145,6) on the switching regulator is
used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which
is to be used as a reserve bottle.
Both regulators are equipped with a pressure controller and the regulator defroster
Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter months.
The pressure gauge (Fig. 145,2) on the central regulator indicates the pressure in
the gas bottle, not the filling level of the gas bottle. The pressure gauge can be used
to test the impermeability of the gas bottle.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 146). The
regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 145,1 and 4) must be opened manually.
The central regulator provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas
bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit show
which gas bottle can be used to provide gas. When both indicator lamps are illumi-
nated, the position of the knob on the switching regulator indicates which gas
bottle is currently being drawn upon.
Operating modes The Duomatic switching facility has two operating modes:
z Winter operation "On and heating"
z Summer operation "On"
Fig. 145 Duomatic switching facility Fig. 146 Operating unit
Z When operating with only one gas bottle (e.g. during the summer) connect the
central regulator to this bottle. Position the knob on the switching regulator in
the red area.
Gas system
8
112 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Putting into operation: Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 145,1 and 4).
Use the knob (Fig. 145,6) on the switching regulator (Fig. 145,5) to select the gas
bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
When the knob is in the red area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas bottle
with the central regulator (Fig. 145,3).
When the knob is in the green area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the switching regulator (Fig. 145,5).
Switch on the Duomatic switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 146).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 146,2) to winter operation "On and heating"
(Fig. 146,4) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 146,6). Both gas pressure regula-
tors are now ventilated. The operating indicator (Fig. 146,3) lights up.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 146,2) to " " (Fig. 146,5). The operating indicator
(Fig. 146,3) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 145,1 and 4).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 146) indicate in the vehicle interior
whether the gas bottles are ready for operation.
z Indicator lamp "A" (Fig. 146,1): Gas bottle on the central regulator
z Indicator lamp "B" (Fig. 146,7): Gas bottle on the switching regulator
Changing gas bottles If an indicator lamp goes out during operation, this signifies that the corresponding
gas bottle is empty and must be replaced. The reserve bottle continues supplying
the gas appliances with gas.
Changing gas bottles:
Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the regulator of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the regulator.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the switching regulator with a half-turn, so that the newly
replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
X When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
Z Always mount the regulator in such a way that the protective cap faces
upwards.
Gas system
8
113Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
8.9 DuoControl switching facility
The DuoControl is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-
bottle gas system. The DuoControl switching facility automatically switches gas
supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle
is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still con-
tinue operation. The DuoControl switching facility is suitable for all commercial gas
bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
Construction of the unit The DuoControl switching facility consists of a reversing valve (Fig. 147,3) and an
operating unit (Fig. 148). The reversing valve is installed between the gas tubes
(Fig. 147,2 and 5). The knob (Fig. 147,4) on the reversing valve is used to select
which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which is to be used as
a reserve bottle.
The reversing valve is equipped with the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents
damage to the gas system during the winter months.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 148). The
regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 147,1 and 6) must be opened manually.
The reversing valve provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas
bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit indicate
the level of the primary bottle. When the green indicator lamp (Fig. 148,6) illumi-
nates, the primary bottle is full. When the red indicator lamp (Fig. 148,5) illumi-
nates, the primary bottle is empty. In this case, the reserve bottle is used for the gas
supply.
Operating modes The DuoControl switching facility has two operating modes:
z Winter operation "On and heating"
z Summer operation "On"
X Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
Z If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching facility
is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Z Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 147 DuoControl switching facility Fig. 148 Operating unit
Gas system
8
114 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Putting into operation: Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 147,1 and 6).
Use the knob (Fig. 147,4) on the reversing valve (Fig. 147,3) to select the gas
bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
Switch on the DuoControl switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 148).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 148,7) to winter operation "On and heating"
(Fig. 148,2) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 148,4). The reversing valve is now
deaerated. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 148,1) illuminates if the winter oper-
ation has been selected and the regulator defroster is activated.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 148,7) to " " (Fig. 148,3). The yellow indicator lamp
(Fig. 148,1) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 147,1 and 6).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 148,5 and 6) indicate in the vehicle
interior whether the primary bottle is ready for operation.
Changing gas bottles If the green indicator lamp (Fig. 148,6) stops illuminating during operation and the
red indicator lamp (Fig. 148,5) illuminates, the gas bottle selected as primary bottle
is empty and needs to be changed. The reserve bottle continues supplying the gas
appliances with gas.
Changing gas bottles:
Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the gas tube of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the gas tube.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the reversing valve with a half-turn, so that the newly replaced
gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
X When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
Electrical system
9
115Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9Electrical system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z safety
z explanations of terms relating to the battery
z 12 V power supply
z living area battery
z loading the batteries
z transformer/rectifier
z panel
z 240 V power supply
z connection to the 240 V power supply
z fuse rating
The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in
chapter 10.
9.1 General safety instructions
The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect the
electrical devices, disconnect the 240 V connection and retract the antennae as a
precaution.
9.2 Terms
Off-load voltage The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i. e. no current is
consumed and the battery is not being charged.
Closed circuit current Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require con-
tinuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive appliances.
This closed circuit current flows even if the 12 V power supply has been switched
off.
Total discharge Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged by
an active appliance and by closed circuit current.
X Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
X All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD
players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated during
the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certification, the
EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "E1" inspection.
Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured. Oth-
erwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board elec-
tronics may result.
Z Total discharge damages the battery.
Electrical system
9
116 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery.
The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). If a battery possesses a
capacity of 80 Ah, then the battery can dispense a current of 1 A for 80 hours or a
current of 2 A for 40 hours.
External influences such as temperature may alter the storage capacity of the bat-
tery.
9.3 12 V power supply
When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply or the 240 V power
supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area with 12 V DC.
The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, electrical
appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be operated for a long time
without using the 240 V power supply.
During heater operation, the circulation fan is switched on and off by a thermostat
control. As a result the living area battery is loaded if no 240 V power supply is con-
nected.
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area
battery and the starter battery.
The 12 V power supply can be cut off with the 12 V main switch on the panel.
Depending on the model, the heater, basic light/entrance step and reserve 4 or
only the electrical entrance step remain on standby. The refrigerator is then only
operated with 12 V if the vehicle engine is running. This helps to prevent the living
area battery from being run down too quickly.
9.3.1 Living area battery
Z To disconnect all electrical 12 V appliances from the power supply, disconnect
the living area battery from the 12 V power supply. Depending on the model,
either press the switch on the transformer/rectifier or activate the battery sepa-
ration on the panel to do so.
Z The radio in the driver's cabin and the independent vehicle heater are by
default connected to the living area battery via a separate fuse. These appli-
ances will stay operational if the living area battery is disconnected from the
power supply via the battery cut-off switch of the transformer/rectifier or the
battery separation on the panel.
Z Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully charged.
For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours before com-
mencing the journey.
Z During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery.
Z Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey.
Z Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Z Use the charger module provided on the transformer/rectifier to charge the
living area battery. When charging externally, use a regulated charger that is
suitable for the battery type and the capacity of the living area battery.
Z For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living area
battery from the 12 V power supply or recharge it regularly.
Z When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type.
Z When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the min-
imum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual for the
charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat when they
are charged. Danger of explosion!
Electrical system
9
117Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Position Depending on the model, the living area battery is installed either under the
driver's seat, under the front passenger's seat or in the bench behind the front pas-
senger's seat.
Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some elec-
trical appliances continuously require.
The self-discharge rate of the battery is dependant on temperature. At 20 to 25 °C
the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The self-discharge
rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 °C the self-discharge rate is
approx. 20 % of the capacity per month.
During periods of low external temperatures, the battery will lose part of its
capacity.
An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.
The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of the
living area battery is consumed.
9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery
Z Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the
vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances.
Danger of short circuit!
Z If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the
ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Z Take note of the battery manufacturer's users and maintenance instructions.
Z The battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means:
It is not necessary to check the acid level.
It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles.
It is not necessary to refill the distilled water.
Even a maintenance-free battery must be charged regularly.
Z Total discharge damages the battery.
Z Recharge battery in good time.
Z Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regulator
and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery
capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect
the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used
for a long period of time.
X The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the skin
or the eyes is to be avoided.
X In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explosion.
Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames
or possible sources of sparks.
X Always remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle
when charging them using an external charger.
Electrical system
9
118 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. If a 240 V
power supply is used, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter battery with a
float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alternator is not
capable of completely charging the starter battery.
9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and
the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge. The
charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This
ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the transformer/
rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area
battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the bat-
teries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the trans-
former/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical
appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved.
The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read
on the panel.
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger
When charging the living area battery and the starter battery with an external
charger, proceed as follows:
Turn off the vehicle engine.
Switch off 12 V main switch on the panel. The indicator lamp will go off.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply.
Disconnect the mains plug from the transformer/rectifier.
Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator tap on
the gas bottle.
There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For this
reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the living area battery or the
starter battery and then the positive.
Remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle.
Check that the external charger is turned off.
Z Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles.
Z If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the
ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Z Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the
vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances.
Danger of short circuit!
Z Before charging the battery, check whether the external charger is approved for
the battery type.
Z Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.
Z Irreparable damage to the living area battery will result if it is overcharged.
Electrical system
9
119Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Connect the external charger to the living area battery or the starter battery. Pay
attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the positive
pole of the battery, then connect the negative terminal "–" to the negative pole
of the battery.
Switch on the external charger.
See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information con-
cerning charge period required for the battery.
See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its strength.
Disconnect the external charger in reverse order.
9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
Z Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Z Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 149 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
1 Main supply socket 240 V~
2 Output: Block 1 - refrigerator
3 Input: Block 2 - control lines, alternator D+
4 Output: Block 4 - heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance
area), entrance step
5 Output: Block 3 - panel
6 Output: Block 5 -
Display solar cell at the board control (if fitted), spare 2, spare 3,
spare 4
7 Output: Block 6 - solar charge regulator (if fitted)
8 Output: Block 7 - auxiliary charging unit
9 Output: Block 8 - consumer circuit 1, consumer circuit 2, TV, water pump, spare 1,
spare 5, spare 6
10 Battery selector switch ("Blei-Säure/Blei-Gel" (lead acid/dryfill))
11 Fuses
12 Battery cut-off switch ("Batterie Ein/Aus" (battery On/Off))
Electrical system
9
120 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
z The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/recti-
fier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
z The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
z The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and secures
them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets.
z The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator, an
auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring functions.
z When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the starter
battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the 12 V living
area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger module
reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from overheating. The
transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an empty living area bat-
tery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are turned on and the
ambient temperatures are high.
Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier is located in the seat console
under the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.
9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch
The battery cut-off switch disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even the
safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly discharging
if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery cut-
off switch is turned off.
Switching on/off:
Press the battery cut-off switch up: Battery ON ("Batterie EIN").
Press the battery cut-off switch down: Battery OFF ("Batterie AUS").
Z When the battery cut-off switch is OFF, the safety/drainage valve opens. The
water flows out of the boiler. When the battery cut-off switch is ON again, close
the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Z Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The refrig-
erator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
Z After switching the battery cut-off switch back on again: Put the basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, heater and spare 4 back into
service (depending on the model). To do so, switch on the 12 V main switch
briefly. This also applies if the living area battery was disconnected and then
reconnected.
Electrical system
9
121Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.5.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the transformer/
rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead acid" or "dry-
fill" battery).
9.5.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living
area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/rec-
tifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas operation.
Measures:
Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the corre-
sponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply back on
for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery voltage is
above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power supply cannot be
switched on again until the living area battery has been recharged.
9.5.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area
battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the bat-
teries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the trans-
former/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical
appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved.
The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read
on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and
the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge. The
charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This
ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the transformer/
rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
X If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the for-
mation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Z Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area battery.
Z The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
Z You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as possible.
Electrical system
9
122 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101)
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
z The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/recti-
fier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
z The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
z The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and secures
them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets.
z The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator and
an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring functions.
z When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the starter
battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the 12 V living
area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
Z Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Z Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 150 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101)
1 Main supply socket 240 V~
2 Connections block 1: Refrigerator
3 Connections block 2: Alternator D+, sensor/control lines, refrigerator power supply
4 Connections block 4: Heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance
area), entrance step
5 Connections block 3: Panel
6 Connections block 5: Spare 2, spare 3, spare 4
7 Connections block 9: Panel
8 Connections block 6: Solar charge regulator (if fitted)
9 Connections block 10:
Display solar cell at the board control (if fitted)
10 Connections block 7: Auxiliary charging unit
11 Connections block 8: Consumer circuit 1, consumer circuit 2, TV, water pump, spare 1,
spare 5, spare 6
12 Battery selector switch: "Blei-Säure/Blei-Gel" (lead-acid/dryfill)
13 Fuses
14 Battery cut-off switch: "Batterie Ein/Aus" (battery On/Off)
1
ELEKTROBLOCK
EBL 101
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
131413
Electrical system
9
123Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger module
reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from overheating. The
transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an empty living area bat-
tery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are turned on and the
ambient temperatures are high.
Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier (Fig. 150) is installed in the seat
console under the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.
9.6.1 Battery cut-off switch
The battery cut-off switch disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even the
safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly discharging
if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery cut-
off switch is turned off.
Switching on/off:
Press the battery cut-off switch up: Battery ON ("Batterie EIN").
Press the battery cut-off switch down: Battery OFF ("Batterie AUS").
9.6.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the transformer/
rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead acid" or "dry-
fill" battery).
Z When the battery cut-off switch is OFF, the safety/drainage valve opens. The
water flows out of the boiler. When the battery cut-off switch is ON again, close
the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Z Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The refrig-
erator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
Z After switching the battery cut-off switch back on again: Put the basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, heater and spare 4 back into
service (depending on the model). To do so, switch on the 12 V main switch
briefly. This also applies if the living area battery was disconnected and then
reconnected.
X If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the for-
mation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Z Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area battery.
Z The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
Electrical system
9
124 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.6.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living
area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/rec-
tifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas operation.
Measures:
Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the corre-
sponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply back on
for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery voltage is
above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power supply cannot be
switched on again until the living area battery has been recharged.
9.6.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living area
battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the bat-
teries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the trans-
former/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical
appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved.
The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read
on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery and
the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge. The
charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This
ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the transformer/
rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.7 Panel IT 992
Z You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as possible.
Fig. 151 Panel IT 992
1 V/tank gauge
2 Current gauge
3 12 V indicator lamp
4 12 V main switch
5 240 V indicator lamp
6 Rocker switch for circulating pump
7 Rocker switch for reading the level in
the water or waste water tanks
8 ALARM warning light for the living area
battery
9 Rocker switch for reading the battery
voltage of the starter and living area
batteries
1 2 3
456789
Electrical system
9
125Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water levels
Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter battery
or the living area battery.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 151,1), note the top scale. The gauge automatically
lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 151,9) up " ": The battery voltage of the starter
battery is displayed.
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 151,9) down " ": The battery voltage of the living
area battery is displayed.
The following tables will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage of the
living area battery displayed on the panel IT 992.
Battery voltage
(values during op-
eration)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V connec-
tion)
Battery operation
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V con-
nection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V connec-
tion)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power supply
overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power supply
overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator is
defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transformer/
rectifier is defective
11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power supply
overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power supply
overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator is
defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transformer/
rectifier is defective
13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only briefly
after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being
charged (float
charge)
– Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Over 14.5 V Battery is over-
charged, defective
alternator control
– Battery is over-
charged, defective
transformer/rectifi-
er
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Electrical system
9
126 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Volume of water/waste
water
The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 151,1), use the bottom scale. The gauge automatically
lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 151,7) up " ": The volume of water is displayed.
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 151,7) down " ": The volume of waste water is dis-
played.
9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery
The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 151,8) flashes as soon as the voltage of the living
area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there is a risk of a
total discharge.
9.7.3 Current gauge for charging/discharging the living area battery
The battery current actually flowing is permanently displayed on the current gauge
(Fig. 151,2). The gauge automatically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
z Red "discharging" zone: Battery is being discharged at the discharging current
indicated between 0 and 30 A.
z Indicator "0": Battery is neither being charged nor discharged.
z Green "charging" zone: Battery is being charged at the charging current indi-
cated between 0 and 30 A.
Z Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Z Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long time
can damage the transducers.
Z When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V
power supply.
Z Total discharge damages the battery.
Z If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
Electrical system
9
127Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.7.4 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 151,4) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of
the living area on and off.
Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare remain ready to operate.
Switching on:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 151,4) up " ": The 12 V living area power
supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 151,3) lights up green.
Switching off:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 151,4) down " ": The 12 V living area power
supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 151,3) goes out.
9.7.5 12 V indicator lamp
The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 151,3) illuminates whenever the 12 V main switch
(Fig. 151,4) is switched on.
9.7.6 240 V indicator lamp
The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 151,5) illuminates whenever line voltage is
available at the transformer/rectifier input.
Display Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V connec-
tion)
Battery operation
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V con-
nection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V connec-
tion)
Notes for charging/
discharge display
Red "discharging"
zone (discharging
current)
No charge!
Too many appli-
ances are switched
on or the alternator
is defective
Appliances are on
Battery is being dis-
charged
No charge!
Too many appli-
ances are switched
on
0 A (there is no cur-
rent)
Battery fully or vir-
tually charged
1)
1)
If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off (apart
from the refrigerator).
Appliances are
switched off
Battery fully or vir-
tually charged
2)
2)
If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off.
Green zone (charg-
ing current)
Battery is being
charged (up to
30 A possible)
Battery is being
charged (only pos-
sible with solar
power)
Battery is being
charged (up to
max. 16 A possible;
with 32 A auxiliary
charging unit)
Z When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents any
unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Z Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regulator
and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery
capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect
the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used
for a long period of time.
Electrical system
9
128 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.7.7 Switch for circulating pump
Switching on:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 151,6): The circulating pump is
switched on.
Switching off:
Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 151,6) " ": The circulating
pump is switched off.
9.8 Panel MP 20-T
9.8.1 240 V indicator lamp
The 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 152,1) illuminates whenever line voltage is available
at the transformer/rectifier input.
Z The luminance of the LEDs and the symbols adapts automatically to the
ambient light.
Z The displays can only be called up if the 12 V power supply is switched on.
Z As soon as a button is pressed, the gauge is automatically illuminated. The dis-
play goes out 20 seconds after the last key has been pressed.
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 152 Panel MP 20-T
1 230 V indicator lamp
2 Volt symbol
3 Ampere symbol
4 Interior temperature button
5 Digital display
6 External temperature button
7 Water tank symbol
8 Waste water tank symbol
9 Clock gauge
10 Lock
11 Reserve button
12 Tanks gauge
13 Tanks button
14 Living area battery button
15 Starter battery button
16 Symbol for starter battery and living area battery
17 Batteries gauge
18 Button for 12 V power supply (12 V main switch)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1112131415161718
Electrical system
9
129Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.8.2 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 152,18) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of
the living area on and off.
Exception: Heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance area)
and entrance step remain operational.
Switching on:
Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 152,18). The 12 V living area power supply is
switched on. The "12 V" indicator lights up.
Switching off:
Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 152,18). The 12 V living area power supply is
switched off. The "12 V" indicator goes out.
Activating battery
disconnection (transformer/
rectifier without battery cut-off
switch):
Switch off 12 V power supply.
Press button for living area battery (Fig. 152,14) and hold it down for approx.
10 seconds. The "V" volt (Fig. 152,2) and "A" ampere (Fig. 152,3) symbols flash
three times. The living area battery is disconnected from the 12 V power supply.
Deactivating battery
disconnection (transformer/
rectifier without battery cut-off
switch):
Press the "12 V" button (Fig. 152,18) and hold it down for approx. 5 seconds. The
"V" volt symbol (Fig. 152,2) flashes three times. The living area battery is con-
nected to the 12 V power supply. The indicator lights up after approx.
2 seconds.
9.8.3 Batteries gauge
The voltage and charging/discharging of the living area battery or the starter bat-
tery voltage can be indicated using the batteries gauge.
Displays:
Press button for living area battery " " (Fig. 152,14). The "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 152,2) lights up. Depending on whether the battery is being charged or
discharged, the "A" ampere symbol lights up white or red respectively. The bat-
tery voltage and current of the living area battery are displayed using the LEDs
in the gauge.
Press button for starter battery " " (Fig. 152,15). The "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 152,2) lights up. The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed
using the LEDs in the gauge.
Z If, after switching on, the "11.0" LED of the volt indicator and the "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 152,2) in the batteries gauge (Fig. 152,17) flash, the voltage of the living
area battery is too low. Charge battery.
Z If, after switching on, the "12 V" indicator, the symbol for the living area battery
(Fig. 152,16) and the "V" volt symbol (Fig. 152,2) flash three times, battery sepa-
ration is activated. Deactivate battery separation.
Z When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents any
unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Z Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regulator
and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the battery
capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore disconnect
the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used
for a long period of time.
Electrical system
9
130 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The tables below will help you interpret the statuses displayed on the panel.
Volt indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
< 11.0 V 11.5 V 12.0 V 12.2 V 12.5 V 12.7 V 13.0 V > 13.5 V
Battery voltage
(values during op-
eration)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V connec-
tion)
Battery operation
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V con-
nection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V connec-
tion)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power supply
overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power supply
overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator is
defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transformer/
rectifier is defective
11.5 V to 13 V 12 V power supply
overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power supply
overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator is
defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Over 13.5 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only briefly
after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.0 V 0 % (discharged)
12.2 V 25 %
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Z Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Ampere indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
Discharging with: Charging with:
> 30 A > 10 A > 3 A > 1 A Ap-
prox.
0 A
> 1 A > 3 A > 10 A
Electrical system
9
131Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.8.4 Tank gauge
The water and waste water quantities can be indicated using the tank gauge.
Displays:
Press tanks button " " (Fig. 152,13). The water tank " " (Fig. 152,7) and
waste water tank " " (Fig. 152,8) symbols light up. The fill level of the water
tank (left-hand scale) and the waste water tank (right-hand scale) are indicated
using the LEDs in the gauge.
The table below will help you interpret the levels displayed on the panel.
9.8.5 Alarms
Battery alarm The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 152,2) and the "11.0" LED flash as soon as the battery
voltage falls below 11 V (measured during operation) and there is the threat of a
total discharge.
Measures:
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the bat-
tery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power supply.
Tank alarm
The water tank symbol " " (Fig. 152,7) or waste water tank symbol " "
(Fig. 152,8) flashes when the water tank is empty or the waste water tank is full.
Measures:
Fill water tank or empty waste water tank.
Current displayed System status "A" ampere symbol
-30 A to -10 A Battery is being heavily dis-
charged
Lights up red
-10 A to -1 A Battery is being discharged Lights up white
0 A Battery current is low or
0 A
Lights up white
+1 A to +10 A Battery being charged Lights up white
Level indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
25 % 50 % 75 % 100 %
Z The alarm functions are only active when the corresponding display is called up.
Perform checks regularly.
Z It is best to perform checks in the morning, before the 12 V appliances are
switched on.
Z Total discharge damages the battery.
Z If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
Z If, when the fill levels are called up, the LEDs in the scale flash in addition to the
tank symbol, a sensor error has occurred. Clean tank sensors.
Electrical system
9
132 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.8.6 Temperature display
The internal and external temperatures can be indicated using the digital display
(Fig. 152,5).
Displays:
Press internal temperature button " " (Fig. 152,4). The internal temperature
is displayed.
Press external temperature button " " (Fig. 152,6). The external tempera-
ture is displayed.
9.8.7 Clock gauge
The clock gauge (Fig. 152,9) displays the time. The clock has its own battery and is
not connected to the 12 V power supply.
Detach the clock if the battery needs to be replaced or the clock needs to be set.
Detaching clock:
Turn lock (Fig. 152,10) one quarter turn. The lock is released.
Detach clock by pulling forwards.
Fitting clock:
Install clock.
Lightly press lock (Fig. 152,10) and turn a quarter turn.
Check lock by lightly pulling on the clock.
9.8.8 Switch for tank heater
The tank heater can be turned on and off using the "Res" button (Fig. 152,11).
Switching on:
Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 152,11). The "Res" symbol lights up.
Switching off:
Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 152,11). The "Res" symbol goes out.
9.9 240 V power supply
The 240 V power supply provides electricity for:
z sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A
z refrigerator
z transformer/rectifier
The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area are
supplied with voltage by the living area battery.
Connect the vehicle to an external 240 V power supply system as often as possible.
The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically charges the living
area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged with a float charge.
Z The switch status is saved when the 12 V power supply is switched off. This
means: If the tank heater was on when the 12 V power supply was switched off,
the heater is also switched on when the 12 V power supply is switched back on.
X Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
Electrical system
9
133Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.9.1 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to an external 240 V power supply. The cable may
have a length of maximum 25 m.
9.9.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection
Power cable
z Three-core (3 x 2.5 mm
2
) flexible rubber sheathed cable
z Maximum 25 m in length
z 1 plug with earth contact
z 1 socket with earth contact (plug-in devices according to EN 60309)
Connection possibilities For your power cable, we recommend using a CEE connection cable with a CEE
plug and coupling. If this type of connection is not feasible, we recommend the fol-
lowing combination with a safety plug:
z Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 153,1) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 153,2)
z Cable reel:
Socket with earth contact (Fig. 153,3) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 153,4)
z Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 153,5) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 153,6)
X The external 240 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault cur-
rent protection switch (FI-switches, 30 mA).
Z For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) highly sensitive
fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.
X Completely unwind the cable on cable drums to prevent overheating.
Fig. 153 Connection possibilities 240 V
connection
Fig. 154 Connecting an angled connector
with socket
X When using a CEE 17 angled connector with rear socket (Fig. 154,1) only use
a rubberised and sealed IP 44 socket with earth contact (Fig. 154,2). Do not
use sockets without earth contact (Fig. 154,3). Danger of electrocution!
Electrical system
9
134 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Depending on the design, the flap for the 240 V connection is designated with the
symbol " ".
Connecting the power cable:
Open external flap.
Depending on the design, tilt the cover upwards.
Insert connector.
9.10 Fuses
9.10.1 12 V fuses
The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are fused indi-
vidually. The fuses are accessible at different positions in the vehicle.
An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element (Fig. 155,1). If the
fuse element is broken (Fig. 155,2), change the fuse.
Before changing fuses, take the function, value and colour of the relevant fuses
from the following specifications. When changing fuses, only use flat fuses with the
values shown below.
Fuses for the starter battery The fuses are located near the starter battery or near the transformer/rectifier.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed near the transformer/rectifier
in the console of the driver's seat.
Z Depending on the design, disconnect the connector before removing it.
X Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has
been remedied.
X Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off.
X Never bridge or repair fuses.
Fig. 155 12 V fuse
1 Unbroken fuse element
2 Broken fuse element
Electrical system
9
135Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Not illustrated: Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange (for refrigerators with automatic power
selection system)
Fuses on the living area
battery
The fuses are located near the living area battery or in the driver's cabin in front of
the driver's seat.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed in the console of the front pas-
senger's seat.
Fuse for the Thetford toilet
(swivel toilet)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Changing:
Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Pull out the Thetford cassette completely.
Replace fuse (Fig. 158,1 or Fig. 159,1 ).
Fig. 156 Fuses for the starter battery
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
2 Flat fuse for optional devices
3 Flat fuse 5 A/beige
(for the right clearance light)
4 Flat fuse 5 A/beige
(for the left right clearance)
5 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for alternator D+)
6 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line)
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
5
2
2
5
5
2
2
Fig. 157 Fuses on the living area battery
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
2 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
4 Jumbo flat fuse
(value depending on optional device)
Fig. 158 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
1Flat fuse 3 A/purple
Fig. 159 Fuse for the Thetford toilet (alter-
native)
Electrical system
9
136 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Fuse for the Thetford toilet
(fixed seat)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Changing: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Remove the Thetford cassette and swing out the flap in the housing panel.
Replace fuse (Fig. 160,1).
Fuse for the Dometic toilet The fuse is located on the rear side of the control unit for the toilet.
Changing:
Lift the control unit for the toilet (Fig. 161,1) with a suitable tool and pull it from
the wall.
Replace fuse (Fig. 161,2).
Fig. 160 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple
Fig. 161 Fuse for toilet
1 Control unit
2 Flat fuse 7.5 A/brown
1
2
Electrical system
9
137Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
9.10.2 240 V fuse
The 240 V connection is protected by one or several two-pole automatic circuit
breakers (Fig. 162).
Position The automatic circuit breaker is in the wardrobe or under a cover in the rear area
(under the slatted frame), depending on the model.
Fig. 162 240 V automatic circuit breaker
Electrical system
9
138 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Appliances
10
139Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10Appliances
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle.
The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances.
Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction manuals
for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z heater
z air conditioning unit
z boiler
z gas cooker
z gas oven
z microwave oven
z extractor hood
z refrigerator
10.1 General
The heater, boiler, cooker, refrigerator and air conditioning unit are fitted
depending on the model of the vehicle.
In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the appli-
ances and their particular features.
To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the
gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.
Z The heat exchanger of the Truma hot-air heater has to be replaced after
30 years. The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be replaced
after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an authorised specialist
workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The operator of the heater
must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Z For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must corre-
spond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer
as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an
authorised specialist workshop.
Z Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the respec-
tive appliance.
Fig. 163 Symbols for the gas isolator taps
1 Refrigerator
2 Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4 Oven
Appliances
10
140 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.2 Heater
Initial start-up When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour will
occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest position.
Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will disappear by
themselves after a while.
10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle
10.2.2 To heat properly
Hot air distribution Several air outlet nozzles (Fig. 164) are built into the vehicle. Pipes conduct the
warm air to the air outlet nozzles. Turn the air outlet nozzles in a suitable position
so the air can escape as required. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the
dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.
Adjusting the air outlet
nozzles
z Fully open: Full hot air stream
z Half or partially open: Reduced hot air stream
When five air outlet nozzles are completely opened, less warm air escapes through
each nozzle. However, if only three air outlet nozzles are opened, more warm air
flows out of each nozzle.
10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X Never run the heater in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
X Never operate the heater in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages).
Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
X If the awning is put up and the heater is running in gas operation, exhaust
gases from the heater can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffoca-
tion! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.
Fig. 164 Air outlet nozzle
Z When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the heating
system.
Z Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compartment.
Z The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is acti-
vated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area battery, if
the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take into consider-
ation that the living area battery only has limited reserves of energy.
Appliances
10
141Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles. The
heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be operated.
Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:
z Winter operation
z Summer operation
It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the
"Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible to
heat the vehicle in this operating mode.
Selecting operating mode:
Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 165,3).
The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main
switch.
Variant: Heater with gas
operation
The heater is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required room
temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the burner is
switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature sensor next
to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 165,6) water in the boiler
is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 165,5) the heater
can be operated with an empty boiler.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 165,1) on the operating unit to the
desired heating level.
Set rotary switch (Fig. 165,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 165,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 165,6).
Green indicator lamp (Fig. 165,7) is on.
The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.
Switching off:
Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 165,3) to " " (Fig. 165,4).
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to use
up the residual heat.
Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer"
operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.
Fig. 165 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Temperature control knob
2 Summer operation water temperature
40 °C or 60 °C
3 Rotary switch
4 Off
5 Winter operation "Heater without
boiler"
6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-
tion"
8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
Appliances
10
142 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Variant: Heater with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
The heater can be operated with different types of energy:
z Gas operation (Fig. 166,3)
z 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 166,2) or 1800 W
(Fig. 166,1)
z Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 166,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 166,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-
up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 165) is set to
winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illuminates
(Fig. 166,6).
Z 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the
240 V power supply.
Z Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to
the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for
7.8 A fuse).
Z When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only in 240
V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 166 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V electrical
operation"
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater" instruction
manual.
Z For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
Appliances
10
143Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater
Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles. The
heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be operated.
Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:
z Winter operation
z Summer operation
It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the
"Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible to
heat the vehicle in this operating mode.
Selecting operating mode:
Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 167,3).
The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main
switch.
Variant: Heater with gas
operation
The heater is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required room
temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the burner is
switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature sensor next
to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 167,6) water in the boiler
is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 167,5) the heater
can be operated with an empty boiler.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 167,1) on the operating unit to the
desired heating level.
Set rotary switch (Fig. 167,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 167,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 167,6).
The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.
Z When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the heating
system.
Z Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compartment.
Z The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is acti-
vated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area battery, if
the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take into consider-
ation that the living area battery only has limited reserves of energy.
Fig. 167 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Temperature control knob
2 Summer operation water temperature
40 °C or 60 °C
3 Rotary switch
4 Off
5 Winter operation "Heater without
boiler"
6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Appliances
10
144 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching off: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 167,3) to " " (Fig. 167,4).
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to use
up the residual heat.
Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer"
operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.
Variant: Heater with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
The heater can be operated with different types of energy:
z Gas operation (Fig. 168,3)
z 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 168,2) or 1800 W
(Fig. 168,1)
z Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 168,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 168,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-
up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 167) is set to
winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illuminates
(Fig. 168,6).
Z 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the
240 V power supply.
Z Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to
the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for
7.8 A fuse).
Z When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only in 240
V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 168 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation (900
W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation (1800
W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V electrical
operation"
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater" instruction
manual.
Z For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
Appliances
10
145Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater
The hot-water heater has been fitted below in the wardrobe.
Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:
z Display (touch screen)
z Control buttons
Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:
Display The display (Fig. 169,1) is designed as a touch screen. Touching the symbols calls
up the relevant function.
Z Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in chapter 13.
Z Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.
Z Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compartment.
Z The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater is
in operation.
Z We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater operation
and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 13.
Z When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last settings used.
Z For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual
and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 13.
Z For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
Fig. 169 Operating unit for hot-water
heater
1 Display (touch screen)
2 "Menu" button
3 On/Off button
Z When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to home
position after two minutes.
Z Changes to the settings are saved automatically after 10 seconds.
Pos. in
Fig. 169
Button Function
2 MENU Open adjustment menu
3
Activate heating
Appliances
10
146 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Start screen The Start screen appears on the display after the heater is switched on. The Start
screen contains the following information:
Adjustment menu The "MENU" button calls up the adjustment menu. The meanings of the individual
symbols are described in the following table.
The values can be increased or reduced via the "+" or "-" symbols.
Resetting the heating to the
factory setting:
Keep the "MENU" button pressed for 15 seconds.
Tool menus The various heater functions can be called up and adjusted via the tool menus. The
arrow symbols are used to change between the menus. The meanings of the indi-
vidual symbols are described in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Setting the pump speed:
Press the "MENU" button.
Press the " " symbol.
Press the " " symbol.
Page downward using the arrow.
Press the " " symbol.
Press the "+" button until the desired level has been reached.
Use the "OK" button to confirm the entry.
Selecting the operating
mode
The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:
z Gas operation
z 240 V electrical operation
z Gas and 240 V electrical operation
The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.
Selecting gas operation:
Press the "On" button next to the " " symbol. The gas operation is activated.
Symbol Signification
This symbol appears when the circulating pump is activated
This symbol appears when a switching facility for gas cylinders is ac-
tivated
This symbol appears when a voltage of 240 V is present at the heater
The internal temperature is displayed next to this symbol
The external temperature is displayed next to this symbol if an exter-
nal sensor is fitted
Symbol Signification
Set the desired temperature of +5 °C to +30 °C
Set the water temperature in the boiler
Set the heat output in electrical operation
Activate the function "Heating in gas operation"
Call up the enabling menu for the tool menus
Appliances
10
147Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Selecting 240 V electrical
operation:
Press the "+" button next to the " " symbol until the desired heat output is
reached.
Selecting gas and 240 V
electrical operation:
Select gas operation and 240 V electrical operation on the operating unit.
When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.
Switching on the heater:
Press " " button. The Start screen appears in the display. The heater starts
automatically.
Switching the heater off:
Press " " button. The heater is turned off.
Switch for water pump The switch for the water pump is located under the driver's seat.
Switching on:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch: The water pump is switched on.
Switching off:
Press the lower part of the rocker switch " ": The water pump is switched
off.
Alde heat exchanger
The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during travel
without operating the hot-water heater in the living area.
The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and thus
has the same function as the vehicle heater.
Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator.
Z Select the output level during 240 V electrical operation in such a way that it
corresponds to the 240 V connection protection:
Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A
Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A
Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A
Z If gas and 240 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is connected
to the 240 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only operates in
240 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient does the gas oper-
ation also automatically switch on.
Z The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle and
the gas isolator tap are opened.
Z 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the
240 V power supply.
Z Switching on and off applies only for IVECO vehicles.
Z The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running.
Z If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat exchanger
on the stopcock should be shut off.
Appliances
10
148 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The heat exchanger stopcock is located directly on the exchanger.
Turning on:
Set stopcock handle (Fig. 170,1) parallel to the pipe.
Shutting off:
Set drain cock handle (Fig. 170,1) at a right angle to the pipe.
Alde auxiliary circulating
pump
The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 171,1) can be used to heat the vehicle engine
when parked.
The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit
and thus functions as an engine heater.
The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 172,2) is located next to the hot-water
heater operating unit. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 172,1) illuminates when the
pump is operated.
Setting the rotational speed
of the circulating pump
Setting the output:
Set the adjusting screw at the pump to Level 2.
To ventilate the pump set the adjusting screw to Level 5.
Fig. 170 Alde heat exchanger
Z The auxiliary circulating pump works only if the heat exchanger has been
installed and started, and the hot-water heater is running.
Fig. 171 Auxiliary circulating pump Fig. 172 Operating switch for auxiliary cir-
culating pump
Z Level 2 = Normal level
Z Level 5 = Ventilation
Appliances
10
149Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
240 V circulating pump Depending on the equipment, the hot-water heater has an additional 240 V circu-
lating pump.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, then it is possible to switch
to the higher output of the 240 V circulating pump.
The switch for switching between the 12 V circulating pump and the 240 V circu-
lating pump is located on the hot-water heater operating unit.
10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger
The auxiliary heat exchanger is built into the bench seat.
The auxiliary heat exchanger may be used to provide the vehicle's living area with
additional heat during the journey.
The auxiliary heat exchanger is integrated into the heat circulation of the base
vehicle and is therefore only in operation when the vehicle engine is running.
Switching on:
Turn the control knob (Fig. 173,1) of the flow control to the desired position. The
water circulation is open.
Turn the fan switch (Fig. 173,2) for the circulation fan in a clockwise direction.
Switching off:
Turn the fan switch (Fig. 173,2) to " ".
Turn the control knob (Fig. 173,1) of the flow control to its initial position.
X Do not operate the auxiliary heat exchanger at petrol stations. Danger of
explosion!
Z The fan on the auxiliary heat exchanger can be used for ventilation.
Z The heat output is continuously adjusted.
Fig. 173 Operating controls for auxiliary
heat exchanger
1
2
Appliances
10
150 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater
The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater. The
heating of the engine can be switched off.
The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a timer.
The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from 1 minute to
24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of which only one can
be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is 60 minutes.
Switching on manually:
Press the button (Fig. 174,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 174,9). The fan will only be switched on when there is a coolant tempera-
ture of 30 °C.
Switching off manually:
Press the button (Fig. 174,7). The symbol (Fig. 174,9) goes off.
Switching on the engine
heating:
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 174,4). Engine is preheated. The fan is
switched on immediately.
Switching off the engine
heating:
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 174,4). Engine stays cold.
Setting the time:
Press the button (Fig. 174,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 174,8).
Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 174,3 and 6).
Programming heating start:
Press the button (Fig. 174,5).
Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 174,3 and
6).
Selecting programmed
switching on time:
Keep pressing button (Fig. 174,5) until the selected programme number
(Fig. 174,1) appears in the display.
X Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger of
suffocation!
X Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger of
explosion!
Fig. 174 Operating unit for independent
vehicle heater
Appliances
10
151Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and waste water pipes (winter
comfort package)
In order to prevent waste water fittings freezing up, the waste water tank and the
waste water pipes can be electrically heated separately.
When the heater is turned on, temperature sensors monitor the temperature of the
waste water tank and the waste water pipes. If the temperature falls below 5 °C, the
heating elements are switched on and the waste water tank and waste water pipes
are heated. If the temperature rises above a certain level, the heating elements are
switched off again.
The control unit (Fig. 175) is installed in the wardrobe. The control lamps on the
control unit have the following meanings:
z The indicator lamp (Fig. 175,2) lights up in green: Regulation in operation.
z Indicator lamp (Fig. 175,1) lights up in red: Waste water tank is heated.
z Indicator lamp (Fig. 175,3) lights up in red: Waste water pipes are heated.
To turn it on and off, use the rocker switch on the panel.
10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit
The regulator for the electrical floor warming unit is located in the wardrobe.
Fig. 175 Control unit
HORN
1 2 3
X On models with electrical floor warming unit, never drill holes in the floor or
screw in any screws. Careful with sharp objects. There is danger of a power
cut or a short circuit due to damage to a heater wire.
Z Do not cover the regulator. Danger of overheating!
Z The electrical floor warming unit only operates if the vehicle is connected to the
240 V power supply.
Z The output of the electrical floor warming unit alone is not sufficient to heat the
living area.
Appliances
10
152 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Operating levels The electrical floor warming unit has four operating levels:
z 0 "Off"
z 20 V "Low heating level"
z 22 V "Medium heating level"
z 24 V "High heating level"
Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply (see section 9.9.1).
Turn the control knob (Fig. 176,2) to the required heating level.
Switching off:
Turn control knob (Fig. 176,2) to "0" position.
After switching off, the floor remains warm for a while, due to residual heat.
If the regulator is overloaded, the overload protection is actuated. The pin
(Fig. 176,1) jumps out.
Switching on overload
protection:
Press the pin (Fig. 176,1) on the overload protection when the regulator is
cooled.
10.3 Air conditioning unit
10.3.1 Air conditioning unit Truma
To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote control in
the direction of the receiver.
Fig. 176 Regulator for electrical floor
warming unit
1
2
Z The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 240 V power
supply.
Z The external 240 V power supply must be protected by a fuse of at least 3 A. It is
otherwise not possible to operate the air conditioning unit properly.
Fig. 177 Receiver Fig. 178 Remote control
Appliances
10
153Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is
ready to operate.
Switch on the remote control with the switch (Fig. 178,7). The green indicator
lamp (Fig. 177,1) indicates cooling mode.
Set the desired operating mode with the key (Fig. 178,8).
z"FAN": Only ventilation without cooling.
z"COMFORT": Cooling. The fan output and the room temperature can be set
separately. The green indicator lamp in the receiver indicates the com-
pressor is in operation and therefore cooling mode.
Set the desired fan output and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 178,3 and
4) if necessary. The arrow (Fig. 178,9) indicates the selected setting mode.
If the temperature set on the remote control is reached, the green indicator lamp
goes out, the compressor is switched off and the circulation fan continues to run.
Switching off:
To switch off, press the key (Fig. 178,7) on the remote control again.
Timer The air conditioning unit can be switched on or off automatically from the current
time up to 15 hours in advance with the integrated timer. Pre-programming up to
a certain time is not possible.
To program, switch on the air conditioning unit with the key (Fig. 178,7) on the
remote control.
Set the desired operating mode and room temperature with the keys
(Fig. 178,8, 3 and 4).
Use the key (Fig. 178,5) to select the desired function (Fig. 178,1):
z"ON": Switching on
z"OFF": Switching off
Use the keys (Fig. 178,4) to select the desired switching time (1 to 15 hours). The
arrow (Fig. 178,2) flashes and indicates the setting mode.
If "ON" (switch on) was selected, the air conditioning unit must be switched off
again with the remote control after the setting process. The indicator lamp in
the receiver flashes and confirms the programming.
The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming if
"OFF" (switch off) was selected. Do not switch off the air conditioning unit with
the remote control.
Z An additional key switch (Fig. 177,2) is on the receiver, which can be used to
switch the air conditioning unit off or on without remote control. If the air con-
ditioning unit is switched on by means of this key switch, the operating mode
set last on the remote control is automatically selected.
Z Condensation accumulates on the vaporiser in cooling mode. To counter-act
any formation of germs, operate the air conditioning unit about 5 to 10 minutes
in the "FAN" and "HIGH" positions to dry the vaporiser.
Z To go easy on the batteries in the remote control, the infrared transmitter can
be covered by hand and the remote control then switched off after the "OFF"
programming. In this way no signal is transferred to the receiver and the pro-
gramming is retained.
Z The key (Fig. 178,6) is used to send the settings of the remote control repeatedly
to the receiver.
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Appliances
10
154 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.3.2 Air conditioning unit (Teleco)
The air conditioning unit is located on the roof of the vehicle. The remote control
(Fig. 181) for the air conditioning unit is located in the kitchen area.
Switching on:
Connect the vehicle to the 230 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is
ready to operate. The red LED (Fig. 180,2) lights up.
Switch on the remote control at the switch (Fig. 181,5).
Set the desired operating mode using the button (Fig. 181,1).
The green indicator lamp (Fig. 180,3) indicates cooling operation, the red indi-
cator lamp (Fig. 180,4) heating operation.
z "COOLING"
z "AUTOMATIC"
z "HEATING"
If necessary, use the buttons (Fig. 181,3 and 4) to set the desired fan output and
room temperature.
Switching off:
To switch off press the button (Fig. 181,5) on the remote control again.
Fig. 179 Roof view Fig. 180 Interior view
Fig. 181 Remote control
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
Appliances
10
155Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.4 Boiler
10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle
10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler
The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas operation) or
with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The boiler is
switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 182,2) on the operating unit
(Fig. 182). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical operation)
with the energy selector switch (Fig. 184).
In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 182,3) the water is automatically
heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the
required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat up
until the set water temperature has been reached.
In summer operation (Fig. 182,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to either
40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. 25 minutes. The yellow indi-
cator lamp illuminates during the boiler heating-up period.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X Never run the boiler in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
X Never operate the boiler in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages).
Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
X The water in the boiler can be heated up to 65 °C. Risk of scalding!
Z Never use boiler when empty.
Z If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost.
Z Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you require a
large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the build-up of
limescale.
Z Dethleffs recommends that water from the boiler is not used as drinking water.
X If the awning is put up and the boiler is running in gas operation, exhaust
gases from the boiler can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffocation!
Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.
Fig. 182 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Summer operation water temperature
40 °C or 60 °C
2 Rotary switch
3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
Appliances
10
156 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The power supply for the appliance cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V
main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator lamp on the operating unit illu-
minates (see chapter 15).
Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 183). The safety/drainage
valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost and the heater
is not switched on.
Variant: Boiler with gas
operation
The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is already
switched on.
Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 182,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 182) to "Summer
operation" (Fig. 182,1).
The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 182,5) is illuminated during the heating up period.
When the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and
the yellow indicator lamp fades.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 182,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 182) to " ".
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Z When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/drainage
valve and empty the boiler.
Z At temperatures below 2 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically.
Before filling the boiler, switch on the heater and wait until the temperature on
the safety/drainage valve is above 6 °C. Only then can the safety/drainage valve
be closed once again.
Z The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by the
safety/drainage valve.
Z The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g. leaves,
ice) at all times.
Fig. 183 Safety/drainage valve of the
boiler - opened position
Appliances
10
157Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Variant: Boiler with gas and
240 V electrical operation
The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:
z Gas operation (Fig. 184,3)
z 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 184,2) or 1800 W
(Fig. 184,1)
z Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 184,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 184,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-
up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 182) is set to
winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illuminates
(Fig. 184,6).
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve. Turn the knob (Fig. 183,1) perpendicular to the
safety/drainage valve and press the button (Fig. 183,2) in.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The
warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.
This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Z 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the
240 V power supply.
Z Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to
the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for
7.8 A fuse).
Z When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in 240
V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 184 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V electrical
operation"
Appliances
10
158 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Emptying the boiler: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 182,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 182) to " ".
Open the safety/drainage valve. To do this turn the knob (Fig. 183,1) parallel to
the safety/drainage valve. The snap fastener (Fig. 183,2) jumps out. The boiler is
drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx.
10 litres).
10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler
The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas operation) or
with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The boiler is
switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 185,2) on the operating unit
(Fig. 185). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical operation)
with the energy selector switch (Fig. 187).
In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 185,3) the water is automatically
heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the
required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat up
until the set water temperature has been reached.
In summer operation (Fig. 185,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to either
40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. one hour. The yellow indicator
lamp illuminates during the boiler heating-up period.
The voltage supply for the unit and the safety/drainage valve cannot be inter-
rupted by the 12 V main switch. Depending on the model, the red indicator lamp
lights up on the operating unit for Trumatic C heater/boiler when a fault occurs (see
chapter 15).
Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 186). The safety/drainage
valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost and the heater
is not switched on.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Boiler".
Fig. 185 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Summer operation water temperature
40 °C or 60 °C
2 Rotary switch
3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
Z When the safety/drainage valve is closed a small electrical power flows which
puts an extra load on the living area battery. Therefore, a daily check of the bat-
tery voltage panel is recommended. If the battery voltage drops to below 10.8 V
the function of the safety/drainage valve can no longer be guaranteed.
Z When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/drainage
valve and empty the boiler.
Appliances
10
159Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Variant: Boiler with gas
operation
The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is already
switched on.
Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 185,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 185) to "Summer
operation" (Fig. 185,1).
The yellow indicator lamp is illuminated during the heating up period. When the
set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and the
yellow indicator lamp fades.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 185,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 185) to " ".
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Variant: Boiler with gas and
240 V electrical operation
Z At temperatures below 8 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically.
Therefore, you must switch on the living area heater and wait until the living
area temperature exceeds 8 °C before you fill the boiler.
Z The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by the
safety/drainage valve.
Z The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g. leaves,
ice) at all times.
Fig. 186 Safety/drainage valve of the
boiler - opened position
Z 240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the
240 V power supply.
Z Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to
the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for
7.8 A fuse).
Z When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in 240
V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Appliances
10
160 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:
z Gas operation (Fig. 187,3)
z 240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 187,2) or 1800 W
(Fig. 187,1)
z Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 187,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 187,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the heating-
up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 185) is set to
winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illuminates
(Fig. 187,6).
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, pull the pull switch
(Fig. 186,1) up.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The
warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.
This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 185,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 185) to " ".
Open the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, push the pull switch
(Fig. 186,1) down. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage
valve.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx.
12.5 litres).
Fig. 187 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V electrical
operation"
1
230V~
Trumatic C EH
ruma
2
3
4
5
6
Z Because of the suction effect, a part of the water supply can be also drained
from the lines and the water tank. The water system is however not completely
emptied.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Boiler".
Appliances
10
161Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.4.4 Alde boiler
Switching the boiler on/off The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not pos-
sible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 10.2.5.
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Close drain cock. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 188,1) horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The
warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.
This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Switch off boiler.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Open drain cock (Fig. 188). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 188,1) in a vertical
position. The boiler is drained to the outside using the drain cock.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx.
12.5 litres).
10.5 Cooker
Fig. 188 Drain cock
1
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open
windows or the skylight.
X Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating.
X Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han-
dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.
Appliances
10
162 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.5.1 Gas cooker
The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.
Depending on the model, the operating controls for the gas cooker are found on
the operating panel or directly on the gas cooker.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker".
Open the gas cooker lid.
Turn the control knob (Fig. 189,1) on the burner you wish to use to the ignition
position (large flame).
Press the control knob down and hold it.
Light the burner with a gas lighter, a match or other suitable means of lighting.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.
X During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects or
highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be near the
gas cooker. Fire hazard!
X The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be covered
by cooking pans placed on the cooker.
X Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring. When
closing there is danger of getting injured!
Z Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob.
Z Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation.
Z Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed.
Z Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid.
Z Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Otherwise
the glass plate could shatter.
Z Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker
burners.
Z When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas
cooker".
Fig. 189 Operating controls for gas
cooker
Fig. 190 Alternative: Operating controls
for gas cooker
1
1
Appliances
10
163Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching off: Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo)
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Fully open the oven flap (Fig. 191,3).
Lightly press control knob (Fig. 191,2) and set to " " (oven) or " " (grill).
Press the control knob (Fig. 191,2) and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Gas will
stream into the burner.
Press the lighting switch (Fig. 191,1) repeatedly until there is a flame.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn control knob (Fig. 191,2) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
X Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
X There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being lit.
X The oven flap must remain open when it is being lit.
X If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
X If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your
service centre.
X If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, switch the oven off and leave
the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
X When grilling, pull out the heat guard and leave the flap fully open.
Z Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at maximum
temperature without any contents.
Z When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas
oven".
Fig. 191 Gas oven (Spinflo)
Appliances
10
164 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic)
The oven is equipped with electronic ignition.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Gently press the control knob (Fig. 192,1) and turn left to any position.
Press the control knob and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Ignition will take
place automatically.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn the control knob (Fig. 192,1) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
X Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
X There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being lit.
X If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
X If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your
service centre.
X If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to " "
and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
Z Depending on the model the gas oven may come equipped with a grill.
Z Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at maximum
temperature without any contents.
Z When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Gas
oven".
Fig. 192 Gas oven (Dometic)
MIN
MAX
GAS
230V
12V
AUTO
Dometic
1
Appliances
10
165Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.5.4 Microwave oven
Switching on:
Open the door and place foodstuffs into the cooking area.
Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages.
Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 193,1).
Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 193,2). Cooking begins.
The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave oven
will switch off automatically.
Switching off:
Open the door and remove foodstuffs.
X Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs
can cause major risks to the user.
X The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should never
be removed.
X Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed.
X Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage.
X Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation.
X If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and interrupt
the power supply.
Z Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross in
place.
Z Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.
Z The microwave oven only functions with correct 240 V power supply. In the case
of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave oven
switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional 240 V
appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in southern
countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having 230 V but it
really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the microwave oven
cannot be operated in these countries.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Microwave oven".
Fig. 193 Operating controls for micro-
wave oven
Appliances
10
166 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.5.5 Extractor hood
The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The two-level fan blows the
cooking steam directly outside.
Use the switch (Fig. 194,1) to turn the extractor hood on and off.
Use the switch (Fig. 194,2) to turn the cooker lamps on and off.
10.6 Refrigerator
During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At high
ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling power. At
high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit is only guar-
anteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to achieve a better ven-
tilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill
Dometic
Removal:
Turn screw (Fig. 195,1 or Fig. 196,1) one quarter turn using a coin.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
Fig. 194 Extractor hood
1 2
Z When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill. Other-
wise water can enter during rain.
Fig. 195 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Dometic small)
Fig. 196 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Dometic large)
1
Dometic
Appliances
10
167Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Thetford
Removal:
Move the locking device (Fig. 197,1) to the middle.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series, automatic ignition)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
z Gas operation
z Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 198,1) to "GAS".
Fig. 197 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Thetford)
1 2
Z Select only one energy source.
Z Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrig-
erator for a temporary lay-up.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 198 Operating controls for the refrig-
erator (Dometic 7 series)
1 Energy selector switch
2 "230 V" operating indicator
3 "GAS" operating indicator
4 "12 V" operating indicator
5 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
12 V
Dometic
1 32 4 5
230 V
GAS
Appliances
10
168 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Set the control knob (Fig. 198,5) to maximum power. Gas supply is open. Igni-
tion will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition
has been completed successfully. The "GAS" operating indicator (Fig. 198,3)
lights up yellow.
Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.
Switching off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
z 240 V AC
z 12 V DC
Switching the 240 V operation
on:
Set energy selector switch (Fig. 198,1) to "230 V". The "230 V" operating indi-
cator (Fig. 198,2) lights up green.
Use the control knob (Fig. 198,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V operation
off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Switching the 12 V operation
on:
Set energy selector switch (Fig. 198,1) to "12 V". The "12 V" operating indicator
(Fig. 198,4) lights up green.
Use the control knob (Fig. 198,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V operation
off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter bat-
tery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when
the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not running, the refriger-
ator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over
to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
Z Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated elec-
trically.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Appliances
10
169Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection and
frame heater)
Operating modes The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). The AES auto-
matically selects the optimal energy source and regulates the refrigerator opera-
tion. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not required.
The AES selects from the following types of power:
z Solar installation 12 V
z 240 V AC
z 12 V DC
z Gas
Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.
240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the first pri-
ority by the AES.
12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running and the
alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.
Gas operation
If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not running
the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the ignition fuse is
opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same time the elec-
tronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by blast of wind, the
ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas. When the gas operation is
faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 199,4) flashes red.
Z Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrig-
erator for a temporary lay-up.
Fig. 199 Operating controls for the refrig-
erator (Dometic 7 series with AES
and FH)
1 Frame heater (FH) button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Energy selector switch
4 Indicator lamps
5 Indicator lamps
6 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Z Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Appliances
10
170 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Change-over between
energy sources
When changing over between the different power sources there are forced delays
built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy source the
refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over from 12 V oper-
ation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES. This prevents a change-
over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped briefly and the engine is
switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle
thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the control
knob (Fig. 199,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 199,5) show the selected thermostat
position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the
control knob. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal operating
temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will
be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of
power being used.
Frame heater (FH)
High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to form on
the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refrigerator is
equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the temperature and
humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the button (Fig. 199,1).
This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on, the indicator lamp
(Fig. 199,2) will be lit.
Manual operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Select the energy type with the energy selector switch (Fig. 199,3). The respec-
tive indicator lamp (Fig. 199,4) lights up green.
Adjust refrigerating temperature with the control knob (Fig. 199,6). The indi-
cator lamps (Fig. 199,5) show the selected thermostat position.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 199,4) flashes red.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living area
battery.
Switching off:
Turn the energy selector switch (Fig. 199,3) to " ". No indicator lamp
(Fig. 199,4) is lit.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
X Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer than
15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy selector
switch.
Z If the frame heater is switched on, it will always consume current. Therefore,
switch off the frame heater if the vehicle engine is off and the vehicle is not con-
nected to the 240 V power supply.
Z If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume current.
Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running,
and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
Appliances
10
171Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
10.6.4 Operation (Dometic 8 series)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
z Gas operation
z Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 200,2) to " ".
Press the control knob (Fig. 200,3), turn it to the highest level and hold it down.
Wait until gas gets into the burner.
Press the gas ignition button (Fig. 200,4) and keep it pressed. Ignition will take
place automatically.
Keep gas ignition button (Fig. 200,4) pressed down until the flame indicator
(Fig. 200,1) becomes green and then release it.
Keep the control knob (Fig. 200,3) pressed for another 10 to 15 seconds, then
release it.
Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.
Switching off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Z Select only one energy source.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 200 Operating controls for the refrig-
erator (Dometic 8 series)
1 Flame indicator
2 Energy selector switch
3 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
4 Gas ignition button
1 2 3 4
Appliances
10
172 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
z 240 V AC
z 12 V DC
Switching the 240 V operation
on:
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 200,2) to " ".
Use the control knob (Fig. 200,3) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V operation
off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Switching the 12 V operation
on:
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 200,2) to " ".
Use the control knob (Fig. 200,3) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V operation
off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter bat-
tery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when
the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not running, the refriger-
ator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over
to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.5 Operation (Dometic 8 series with manual power selection MES)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
z Gas operation
z Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Z Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated elec-
trically.
Z Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Z Select only one energy source.
Z Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrig-
erator for a temporary lay-up.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Appliances
10
173Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 201,1) down for 2 seconds
in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode chosen
most recently lights up.
If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 201,1) until
the gas operating indicator " " lights up. Gas supply is open. Ignition will take
place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been com-
pleted successfully.
Use switch (Fig. 201,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.
Switching off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrigerator
is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
z 240 V AC
z 12 V DC
Switching the 240 V operation
on:
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 201,1) down for 2 seconds
in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode chosen
most recently lights up.
If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 201,1) several
times until the operating indicator 240 V " " lights up.
Use switch (Fig. 201,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V operation
off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrigerator
is switched off.
Fig. 201 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with MES)
1 On/off switch/energy selector switch
2 Display-LED "open door" (only for central locking system of the refrigerator door)
3 Display-LED "fault"
4 Operating indicators
5 Display-LED "temperature range"
6 Switch for temperature setting
7 Door opener (only for refrigerator door central locking system)
Mode
Dometic
1 2 43 5 6 7
Z Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated elec-
trically.
Appliances
10
174 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching the 12 V operation
on:
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 201,1) down for 2 seconds
in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode chosen
most recently lights up.
If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 201,1) several
times until the operating indicator 12 V " " lights up.
Use switch (Fig. 201,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V operation
off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrigerator
is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter bat-
tery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when
the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not running, the refriger-
ator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over
to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.6 Operation (Dometic 8 series with automatic power selection)
Operating modes
The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). If automatic
operation (AU) is selected, the AES automatically selects the optimum energy
source and regulates the refrigerator operation. Manual intervention to select the
type of power is possible but not required.
The AES selects from the following types of power:
z Solar installation 12 V
z 240 V AC
z 12 V DC
z Gas
Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.
In the case of a fault, the LED display fault will flash " " (Fig. 202,3).
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Fig. 202 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with AES)
1 On/off switch/energy selector switch
2 Display-LED "open door" (only for central locking system of the refrigerator door)
3 Display-LED "fault"
4 Operating indicator
5 Display-LED "temperature range"
6 Switch for temperature setting
7 Door opener (only for refrigerator door central locking system)
Mode
Dometic
1 2 43 5 6 7
Appliances
10
175Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the first pri-
ority by the AES.
12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running and the
alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.
Gas operation
If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not running
the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the ignition fuse is
opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same time the elec-
tronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by blast of wind, the
ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas. In the case of a fault in gas
operation the text "GAS" flashes in the operating indicator (Fig. 202,4).
Change-over between
energy sources
When changing over between the different power sources there are forced delays
built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy source the
refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over from 12 V oper-
ation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES. This prevents a change-
over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped briefly and the engine is
switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle
thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the switch for
temperature setting (Fig. 202,6). The indicator LEDs (Fig. 202,5) show the selected
thermostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is
set with the switch. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal oper-
ating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat set-
ting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the
type of power being used.
Z Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrig-
erator for a temporary lay-up.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Z Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
X Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer than
15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy selector
switch.
Appliances
10
176 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Manual operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 202,1) down for 2 seconds
in order to switch on the appliance. The operating mode selected most recently
is shown in the operating indicator (Fig. 202,4).
Select the energy type with the on/off switch/energy selector switch
(Fig. 202,1).
Set the refrigerating temperature on the switch for temperature setting
(Fig. 202,6). The indicator LEDs (Fig. 202,5) show the selected thermostat posi-
tion.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living area
battery.
Switching off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 202,1) for 2 seconds.
All displays close.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.6.7 Operation (Thetford)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
z Gas operation
z Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the button (Fig. 203,4) on the refrigerator panel.
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the refrigerator automatically selects the thermostat position
selected last. This position can be adjusted manually by using the button
(Fig. 203,1). The bars on the display (Fig. 203,3) indicate the selected thermostat
position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the
button. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal operating tem-
perature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be
maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of
power being used.
Z If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume current.
Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running,
and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Z The refrigerator starts when it is switched on with the setting selected last.
Z The display lights up for about 10 seconds as soon as a button is pressed.
Z In the event of a malfunction, the display flashes in second clock pulses and an
error code is displayed (see section 15.6.2).
Z Select only one energy source.
Z Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrig-
erator for a temporary lay-up.
Appliances
10
177Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator".
Press the button (Fig. 203,2). The display (Fig. 203,3) lights up in blue and the
current settings are displayed.
Press the button (Fig. 203,4). The current setting of the operating mode appears
on the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly until the gas
operating mode " " appears on the display. Gas supply is open. Ignition will
take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been
completed successfully.
Press the button (Fig. 203,1). The current thermostat setting appears on the dis-
play. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly until the desired set-
ting appears on the display.
Switching off:
Press the button (Fig. 203,2). The display (Fig. 203,3) is no longer lit up. Refriger-
ator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
z 240 V AC
z 12 V DC
Switching the 240 V operation
on:
Press the button (Fig. 203,2).
Press the button (Fig. 203,4) repeatedly until the 240 V operating mode " "
appears on the display.
Press the button (Fig. 203,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting
appears on the display.
Switching the 240 V operation
off:
Press the button (Fig. 203,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is
switched off.
X Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
X It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 203 Operating controls for the refrig-
erator (Thetford without SES)
1 Button for thermostat
2 On/Off button
3 Display
4 Button for operating mode
THETF
RD
1 2 3 4
Z Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated elec-
trically.
Appliances
10
178 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Switching 12 V operation on: Press the button (Fig. 203,2).
Press the button (Fig. 203,4) repeatedly until the 12 V operating mode " "
appears on the display.
Press the button (Fig. 203,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting
appears on the display.
Switching 12 V operation off:
Press the button (Fig. 203,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is
switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter bat-
tery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when
the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not running, the refriger-
ator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over
to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.8 Refrigerator door locking mechanism
With some models, the refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The spec-
ifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the freezer com-
partment.
There are two positions for locking the refrigerator door in place:
z Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in operation
z Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrigerator
is switched off
Dometic 7 series
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 204,1) to the left " ".
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door.
Z Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Z During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked in
the closed position.
Z Lock the refrigerator door in ventilation position when the refrigerator is
switched off. This prevents mould forming.
Fig. 204 Locking of the refrigerator door
(Dometic 7 series)
Fig. 205 Refrigerator door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series)
1
Appliances
10
179Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Closing: Fully close the refrigerator door.
Push the lock (Fig. 204,1) completely to the right " ".
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 205,1) keeps the
refrigerator door in a fixed position. The refrigerator door will then stay slightly
open (Fig. 205).
Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer
compartment
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 206,1) to the side, so that the open lock " " (Fig. 206,3) is
completely visible.
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock (Fig. 206,1) to the side, so that the closed lock " " (Fig. 206,2) is
completely visible.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 207,1) keeps the
refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in a fixed position. The refrigerator
door/freezer compartment door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 207).
Dometic 8 series
Opening:
Press the release button (Fig. 208,1) and open the refrigerator door.
Fig. 206 Locking of the refrigerator door/
freezer compartment door
(Dometic 7 series with separate
freezer compartment)
Fig. 207 Refrigerator door/freezer com-
partment door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
Fig. 208 Release button of the refriger-
ator door (Dometic 8 series)
Fig. 209 Lock hook fixture
1
Appliances
10
180 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Closing: Close the refrigerator door. The lock hook engages audibly.
When the vehicle has been positioned, the lock hook can be fixed. The refrigerator
door can now be opened without having to press the release button.
Fixing the lock hook:
Press the fixture (Fig. 209,1) upwards. The lock hook (Fig. 209,2) is pressed
upwards and has no function.
Unlocking the lock hook:
Push the lock hook (Fig. 209,2) down. The lock hook functions again.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Open the refrigerator door.
Press down the unlocking device (Fig. 210,2).
Push locking device (Fig. 210,1) forwards (Fig. 211).
If the refrigerator door is closed now, a gap will remain between the refrigerator
door and the refrigerator.
Thetford
Opening:
Open the refrigerator door at the handle (Fig. 212,2). The lock (Fig. 212,1) is
released automatically.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door. Ensure that the lock is engaged.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Open the lock (Fig. 213,2) and snap it into the locking catch (Fig. 213,1). The
refrigerator door will then stay slightly open.
Fig. 210 Locking device in normal posi-
tion
Fig. 211 Locking device in ventilation
position
Fig. 212 Lock of refrigerator door, closed
(Thetford)
Fig. 213 Refrigerator door in ventilation
position (Thetford)
1
2
2
1
Sanitary fittings
11
181Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11Sanitary fittings
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z water tank
z waste water tank
z complete water system
z toilet compartment
z toilet
11.1 Water supply, general
The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps the
water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically switches on
the water pump and pumps water to the tap.
The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water and
waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.
X Fill water tank from supply systems that have been verified to provide
drinking water quality.
X Only use such hoses or containers when filling that have been approved for
use with drinking water.
X Thoroughly rinse filling hose or container with drinking water before use (2
to 3 times capacity).
X Empty filling hose or container completely after use and close openings of
the filling hose or container.
X Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrink-
able after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thor-
oughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the
vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
X In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system
before using the vehicle.
Z If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk
of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central posi-
tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open.
Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-
carrying components can be avoided in this way.
Z The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
Z Before using the water fittings, the 12 V power supply on the panel must be
switched on. Otherwise the water pump will not work.
Z Two different types of pump are used as water pumps depending on the model:
Submerged pumps or pressurised water pumps.
Z In case of submerged pumps with ventilation or a ventilated non-return valve,
a fine water jet is emitted between the pump cover and base of the connector
when the pump is not submerged completely. This bubbling effect is the actual
ventilation of the pump and thus harmless.
Sanitary fittings
11
182 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Positions of the water
pumps
The submerged pumps are located in the water tank.
The pressurised water pumps (Fig. 214,1) are mounted on the outside of the water
tank.
11.2 Switch for water pump (winter comfort package)
The switch for the water pump is installed under the driver's seat.
At IVECO vehicles the water pump can be switched off with this switch.
At all other vehicles the water pump can be switched off via the panel.
This prevents the water pump from starting if the water system is empty and the
water taps are opened. Otherwise, the water pump will run hot and discharge the
living area battery.
11.3 Water tank
11.3.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap
The drinking water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle, depending
on the model.
Opening:
Open the cover (Fig. 215,1) of the drinking water filler neck.
Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 215,2) and turn a quarter turn in an anti-
clockwise direction.
Fig. 214 Pressurised water pump
X The cap for the drinking water filler neck and for the fuel filler neck are very
similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.
Fig. 215 Cap for the drinking water filler
neck
1
2
Sanitary fittings
11
183Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Remove cap.
Fill the water tank with drinking water.
Closing:
Place the cap on the drinking water filler neck.
Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap sits firmly on the drinking water filler neck.
11.3.2 Water drainage
Models with a double floor A hose line can be connected to the water drain neck under the floor of the vehicle.
The drain cock (Fig. 216,1) is fixed in the double floor. The drain cock is labelled by
the word "Wasser" (water).
Models without double
floor
All models without double floor have no drain cock.
In these models, the water is drained through a stopper in the water tank.
Remove the stopper (Fig. 217,1 or Fig. 218,1) from the drainage opening
(Fig. 217,2) by pulling or unscrewing it.
Fig. 216 Drain cock in the double floor
Fig. 217 Stopper Fig. 218 Stopper
12
Sanitary fittings
11
184 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.3.3 Filling with water
To fill the water tank with drinking water, proceed as follows:
Open drinking water filler neck (Fig. 215).
Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister with
a funnel or similar for filling.
Close drinking water filler neck.
11.3.4 Draining water
Models with double floor To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 219,2) from the water drain neck (Fig. 219,1) by
turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Mount suitable hose to the water drain neck (Fig. 219,1) or place appropriate
container under the water drain neck.
Open drain cock (Fig. 216,1). The water will drain.
Close the drain cock.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direc-
tion.
Models without double
floor
To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unscrew the cap on the water tank.
Remove the stopper from the drainage opening by pulling or unscrewing it. The
water will drain.
Insert or screw in the stopper.
Screw the cap onto the water tank.
X When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is
full.
Fig. 219 Water drain neck and waste
water drain neck
1
2
3
4
Sanitary fittings
11
185Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.4 Waste water tank
11.4.1 Waste water tank (models with double floor)
With the models with a double floor, the waste water tank is heated by the hot air
of the living area heater. This protects the waste water tank from frost when the
living area heater is in operation.
Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is located
on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.
The waste water tap (Fig. 220,2) is fixed in the double floor. The waste water tap is
labelled with the word "Abwasser" (waste water).
A hose line can be connected to the waste water drain neck (Fig. 221,3).
Emptying:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 221,4) from the waste water drain neck
(Fig. 221,3) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Mount suitable hose to the waste water drain neck or place appropriate con-
tainer under the waste water drain neck.
Open the waste water tap (Fig. 220,2). The waste water will run out.
Close the waste water tap.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direc-
tion.
Z In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste water
tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.
Z For models with an double floor: If the living area heater is out of order, the
waste water tank no longer is sufficiently protected against frost.
Z Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could cause
deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.
Z Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or caravan
sites especially provided for this purpose.
Fig. 220 Waste water tap Fig. 221 Waste water drain neck
1
2
3
4
Sanitary fittings
11
186 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.4.2 Waste water tank (models without double floor)
Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is located
on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.
The square bolt for opening the waste water tap is directly accessible under the
vehicle floor.
Emptying:
Place key (Fig. 222,2) onto the square bolt (Fig. 222,1).
In order to open the waste water tap, turn the square bolt a quarter turn.
Completely empty waste water tank.
To close the waste water tap, turn the square bolt back as far as it will go.
11.4.3 Odour seal
In order to prevent odours occurring in the waste water system, the vehicle -
depending on the model - has been equipped with odour seals (Fig. 223,1). The
odour seals are installed in the waste water pipes.
Clean the odour seals every two years at the latest. To do so, unscrew and remove
the bottom cover (Fig. 223,2).
Fig. 222 Operation of the waste water tap
Z For models without double floor, remove the siphon base if there is a risk of
frost. This protects the siphon from freezing up.
Z If the siphon base is removed and the vehicle is used: Place a suitable tank under
the siphon to collect the waste water (not applicable for models with double
floors).
Z For motorhomes that have had "winter comfort package" special equipment
installed in the factory, the waste water pipes are electrically heated. When the
temperature drops below 5 °C, the frost protection equipment turns on auto-
matically.
Fig. 223 Odour seal
Sanitary fittings
11
187Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
With all the Globeline models, the odour seals are only accessible via a hole in the
floor plate. This hole is sealed with a cover plate and made splashproof. To remove
the siphon base, unscrew the four securing bolts and take off the cover plate. The
position of the cover plate is shown in the following illustration.
11.5 Filling the water system
Position the vehicle horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
If necessary, switch on the water pump on the panel.
Clean or disinfect water system.
Fig. 224 Cover plate positions
1 Cover plate for T 7013
2 Cover plate for T 7043
3 Cover plate for T 6813 and T 7073
X When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is
full.
Z The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
Z The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve and,
depending on the model, one or two drain cocks for emptying.
Z Depending on the model, the Alde system (heater/boiler) has one or two drain
cocks for emptying.
Z The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is filled.
Fig. 225 Drain cock
1
Sanitary fittings
11
188 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Close the safety/drainage valve (Truma). For this pull the pull switch upwards or
turn the knob perpendicular to the safety-/drainage valve and press the button
in.
If the temperature is below 6 °C, the safety/drainage valve cannot be closed.
Therefore switch on the living area heater and wait until the temperature of the
safety/drainage valve exceeds 6 °C.
Close all drain cocks. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 225,1) horizontally.
If needed, set the stopper into the drainage opening of the water tank or screw
it in.
Close all water taps.
Fill the water tank with drinking water.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The
warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.
This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water
pipes with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it.
Close all water taps.
Check that the cap on the water tank is not leaking.
11.6 Emptying the water system
Z If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk
of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in central posi-
tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open.
Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-
carrying components can be avoided in this way.
Z If the water pump can be turned off from the panel, always turn off the water
pump from the panel before you empty the water system. Otherwise the water
pump runs until it overheats or the battery is empty.
Z The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve and,
depending on the model, one or two drain cocks for emptying.
Z Depending on the model, the Alde system (heater/boiler) has one or two drain
cocks for emptying.
Fig. 226 Drain cock
1
Sanitary fittings
11
189Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This prevents frost
damage and deposits:
Position the vehicle horizontally.
If necessary, switch off the water pump on the panel.
Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel.
Shut off the boiler (see section 10.4).
Open all drain cocks. To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 226,1) in a vertical posi-
tion.
Open the safety/drainage valve (only for Truma boiler). For this press the pull
switch down or turn the knob parallel to the safety/drainage valve.
For models with water drainage in the water tank:
Unscrew the cap of the water tank.
Open the water tank drain (see section 11.3.4).
For models with an double floor: Remove the cap from the waste water drain
neck and open the drain cock.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Hang the shower handset up in the shower position.
Hold the water pump up until the water pipes are completely empty.
Check whether the water tank is completely empty.
Blow out the remaining water in the water pipes (max. 0.5 bar). To do this,
remove the pipe from the water pump and blow into the pipe.
Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter.
Empty Thetford cassette. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter.
Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly.
Let the water system dry for as long as possible.
After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position.
Leave all drain cocks open.
11.7 Toilet compartment
Z Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other items of
equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.
Z For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet clothing,
close the toilet compartment door and open the window or the toilet compart-
ment skylight. This improves the air circulation.
Z Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is able
to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray.
Z After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise cracks
can appear in the shower tray over time.
Z After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting.
Z Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in the
section 12.2.
Sanitary fittings
11
190 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The switches for the toilet compartment lighting are installed in different places in
the toilet compartment depending on the model.
For example, the light switch (Fig. 227,1) of the toilet compartment is located under
the bathroom cabinet.
11.7.1 Pull-out toilet compartment
Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a pull-out toilet compartment.
The toilet compartment can be modified in just a few manual actions so that a fully-
equipped sanitary room is available for washing etc.
Extending:
Open the wardrobe doors on both sides of the toilet compartment (Fig. 228).
Rotate the spring latches (Fig. 228,2) through half a turn on both sides. The wing
of the locking lever must be at the highest point of the bevelled sleeve
(Fig. 229,1).
Pull out the toilet compartment as far as possible by the handles (Fig. 228,1)
without tilting it.
Turn the spring latches on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage
(Fig. 229,2).
Close the wardrobe doors again.
Pushing in:
Open the wardrobe doors on both sides of the toilet compartment (Fig. 228).
Rotate the spring latches (Fig. 228,2) through half a turn on both sides. The wing
of the locking lever must be at the highest point of the bevelled sleeve
(Fig. 229,1).
Push in the toilet compartment as far as possible by the handles (Fig. 228,1)
without tilting it.
Turn the spring latches on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage
(Fig. 229,2)
Fig. 227 Light switch
Fig. 228 Toilet compartment, pushed in Fig. 229 Toilet compartment locking
1
2
1
2
Sanitary fittings
11
191Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.7.2 Vario toilet
Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a Vario toilet. A Vario toilet can
be changed with few maneuvers so that when the shower is in use, the toilet is
available in its own enclosed cubicle. This protects the toilet area from water spray.
Converting into a shower
cubicle
Push the latch (Fig. 230,1) right on the edge of the wash basin and lightly pull
the wash basin. The wash basin moves forwards with the rear wall.
Turn the wash basin and the rear wall (Fig. 231,1) in the direction indicated.
Enter the toilet compartment and close the toilet door (Fig. 231,2) from the
inside and lock.
Put the latch (Fig. 232,1) of the toilet door in a vertical position and open the
inner part of the toilet door.
Turn the inner part of the toilet door in the direction indicated and push against
the rear wall of the wash basin.
The shower compartment is completely set up and can be used.
Z Only remove the inner part of the toilet door when it is closed.
Z Depending on the model, the Vario toilet is installed reverse to the one shown
here. The conversion is then also done reverse to the Vario toilet shown.
Fig. 230 Vario toilet, locking the shower
wall
Fig. 231 Vario toilet
1
Fig. 232 Vario toilet, toilet door
1
Sanitary fittings
11
192 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Conversion to toilet
compartment
Turn the inner part of the toilet door and to close, place the latch (Fig. 232,1) in
a horizontal position.
Return the wash basin and the rear wall to the initial position and lock.
11.8 Toilet
11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford)
The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the
vehicle or from its own water tank, which is integrated in the toilet.
Filling the water tank:
Open the fresh water filler neck for the toilet (Fig. 233,1) above the flap for the
Thetford cassette and swivel downwards.
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a
funnel or similar for filling.
Close the fresh water filler neck.
Z If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage tank
(cassette).
Z Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight of a
person and could break.
Z Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove the
odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detrimental effect
on the sealing rubbers.
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Z Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping sites or
caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.
Fig. 233 Fresh water filler neck for toilet
1
Sanitary fittings
11
193Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.
The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push the
slide lever (Fig. 234,1 or Fig. 235,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 236,1 or Fig. 237,1).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise
direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 236,2 or Fig. 237,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cas-
sette has to be emptied.
Emptying the water tank:
Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise direc-
tion.
Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl.
Close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direction.
Empty Thetford cassette.
Emptying the Thetford
cassette:
Push the slide lever (Fig. 234,1 or Fig. 235,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding
trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5 and
11.8.6.
Fig. 234 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 235 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling
(alternative)
Fig. 236 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet
Fig. 237 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet (alternative)
Sanitary fittings
11
194 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat
The flushing of the toilet is fed from the water system of the vehicle.
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, turn the
slide lever (Fig. 238,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 238,3).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this turn the slide lever (Fig. 238,1) in
a clockwise direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 238,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cassette has to be
emptied.
Emptying:
Turn the slide lever (Fig. 238,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is
closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5 and
11.8.6.
11.8.3 Toilet (Dometic)
The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle or from
its own water tank, which is integrated in the toilet.
Filling the water tank:
Open the fresh water filler neck for the toilet (Fig. 239,1) above the flap for the
sewage tank and swivel downwards.
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a
funnel or similar for filling.
Close the fresh water filler neck.
Fig. 238 Operating unit Thetford toilet
1
2
3
Fig. 239 Fresh water filler neck for toilet
1Fresh water filler neck
1
Sanitary fittings
11
195Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Let some water run into the toilet bowl before using the toilet. In order to do so
press the flush button (Fig. 241,3) on the control and operating unit (Fig. 240,2).
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the toilet. For this pull out the slide lever
(Fig. 240,1).
For flushing, press the flush button (Fig. 241,3).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do so, push the slide lever back.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 241,2) goes on whenever the sewage tank is filled up to 3/
4.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 241,1) goes on whenever the sewage tank has to be emp-
tied.
Emptying the water tank:
Open the sliding trap. For this pull out the slide lever (Fig. 240,1).
Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl.
Close the sliding trap. To do so, push the slide lever back.
Empty the sewage tank.
Emptying the sewage tank:
Push the slide lever (Fig. 240,1) in. The sliding trap is closed. To empty, the
sliding trap of the toilet must be closed.
Remove the sewage tank and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5 and
11.8.6. The display "Sewage tank removed" (Fig. 241,4) lights up on the control
and operating unit.
Fig. 240 Toilet bowl with control and
operating unit
Fig. 241 Control and operating unit toilet
2
1
Sanitary fittings
11
196 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.8.4 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.
Putting into operation:
Turn on power supply. The yellow LED (Fig. 243,1) on the panel (Fig. 242,1) turns
on for ca. 1 minute. A vacuum is generated in the system.
If the green LED (Fig. 243,3) on the panel lights up, lift the pedal (Fig. 242,3)
briefly, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 242,2) and the stopper
on the bottom is covered with water.
The vacuum toilet is ready for operation.
Flushing: Close the lid of the toilet.
Press down the pedal (Fig. 242,3) for several seconds.
Briefly lift the pedal, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 242,2) and
the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The red LED (Fig. 243,2) lights up if the cassette must be emptied or removed.
Removing the cassette:
Remove the cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5 and 11.8.6.
Z Only flush the toilet if the toilet lid is closed.
Fig. 242 Vacuum toilet Fig. 243 Vacuum toilet panel
Z Flushing only functions if the green LED is lit.
Sanitary fittings
11
197Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.8.5 Removing the cassette
Depending on the model, the sewage tank (cassette) can be accessed via a special
service flap on the outside of the vehicle or via the rear storage space.
Service flap The sewage tank (cassette) can be accessed via the special service flap.
Open the flap for the cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key into
the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 244,1) and turn a quarter turn.
Remove the key.
Press both push-button locks (Fig. 244,2) simultaneously with your thumb and
open the flap for the cassette.
Press the release (Fig. 245,1) and pull out the toilet cassette on the handle
(Fig. 245,2).
Rear storage space The sewage tank (cassette) can be accessed via the rear storage space.
Open the rear storage space flap (see section 7.2).
If the access to the sewage tank (cassette) is closed (Fig. 246,1): Pull out the
toilet compartment (see section 11.7.1).
Press the release (Fig. 247,2) and pull out the sewage tank (cassette) on the
handle (Fig. 247,1).
Z The sewage tank (cassette) can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.
Fig. 244 Flap for the toilet cassette Fig. 245 Thetford cassette
1
2
Fig. 246 Sewage tank access, closed Fig. 247 Sewage tank access, open
1
Sanitary fittings
11
198 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
11.8.6 Emptying the cassette
Take the cassette to a disposal point especially provided for this purpose. As you
do this, point the drainage neck upwards.
If necessary, turn the drainage neck upwards.
Remove the cap of the drainage neck.
Point the cassette with the drainage neck downwards.
For Thetford cassettes: Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The cas-
sette empties.
Close drainage neck with the cap.
If necessary, return the drainage neck to its original position.
Push the cassette back to its original position.
Ensure that the cassette is secured by the retaining clip.
Lock the flap for the cassette.
Fig. 248 Emptying the Thetford cassette
Care
12
199Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12Care
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z exterior of the vehicle
z interior
z water system
z extractor hood
z toilets
z winter operation
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out if you
are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time.
The checklist address the following topics:
z temporary lay-up
z winter lay-up
z start-up after a lay-up
12.1 External care
12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the operating
instructions of the high-pressure cleaner.
When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the cleaning
nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm.
Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle with
pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high-pressure
cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 °C. Keep the jet of
water in constant movement during the washing process. Do not direct the water
jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the ventilation grill or the sky-
lights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may enter the interior.
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle
Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose.
Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures.
Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm water,
dish washing liquid and soft cloth.
Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush. In
the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water.
Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner.
Z Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be dam-
aged.
Z Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pressure
cleaner. The external applications could come off.
Z Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator grills,
the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the forced venti-
lations. The vehicle could be damaged.
Care
12
200 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular
follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow
and the sealing of the surface remains intact.
Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc.
Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.
12.1.4 Underbody
The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody pro-
tection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately. Do not
treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.
12.1.5 Waste water tank
Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.
Cleaning:
Empty the waste water tank.
Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.
If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by hand.
12.1.6 Entrance step
If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubricant
during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the entrance
step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance step.
Z Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the surface!
Z Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish washing
liquid and a soft cloth.
Z Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-containing
additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks may result
from their use.
Z Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone-
removing agents) with acrylic glass.
Z Do not clean vehicle in car wash.
Z Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows.
Z Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water.
Z Treat rubber seals with glycerin.
Z An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up treat-
ment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish. These agents
are available at the accessories shop.
Z Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers and
service centres will be happy to advise you.
Care
12
201Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I)
Clean the insulation mat for the driver's cabin with clear, lukewarm water. Remove
heavier soiling with a cloth and some white spirits. Afterwards, immediately rinse
the cleaned area with lukewarm water.
12.2 Interior care
Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and living
area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser may be
added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted surfaces.
Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on uphol-
stery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery. Always have
it cleaned. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it does not loose its
colour.
Clean the imitation leather coverings by wiping them off in circular motion with
a soft cloth or sponge and a mixture of lukewarm water and mild lather. Treat
stubborn stains with a soft brush. For very hard-to-remove stains, use a mixture
of alcohol and water mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Afterwards, wipe it off with soap water.
Do not use any products that contain solvents or abrasives.
Wipe off Teflon coverings with an absorbent cloth or sponge and use a mild
household detergent.
Never rub wet or oily stains. Instead, dab them with an absorbent cloth. Work
from the outside to the inside to prevent spreading the stain.
When treating solid or dried stains, always try to scrape them off with a dull
knife or scraper or remove them off with a soft brush. Afterwards, dab off any
residue with a moist cloth.
Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned.
Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo.
Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do not place
carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor covering may
stick together.
Z If possible, treat stains immediately.
Z Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see sec-
tion 12.1.3).
Z Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be
treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or scourers
containing sand. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness and forma-
tion of cracks.
Z Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling water
directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water cause damage
to drainage pipes and siphon traps.
Z Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or for
decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause damage
to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying products for decal-
cification.
Z Save water. Mop up all remaining water.
Z Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.
Z For information about the use of maintenance products, our representatives
and service centres will be glad to advise.
Care
12
202 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which
may cause scratching or grooves.
Clean gas cooker only with a moist cloth. Prevent any water from penetrating
the gas cooker. Water may damage the gas cooker.
Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or
vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner.
Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the
vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at
30 °C (curd soap).
Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of
the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap
at 30 °C (curd soap).
Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt must be
completely dry before being rolled up.
12.3 Water system
12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank
Empty the water tank and close the drainage opening.
Remove the cap of the water tank.
Fill water tank with water and some washing-up liquid (do not use any
scourers).
Using a trade standard brush for washing dishes, scrub the water tank until
there is no longer any visible deposit.
Scrub also the pump housing.
If possible, clean fresh water sensors through the cleaning openings by hand.
Rinse water tank with copious amounts of drinking water.
12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes
Empty the water system.
Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
Fill mixture of water and cleaning agent into the water tank. Observe the man-
ufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
Open the drain cocks one by one.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has
reached the respective drain.
Close the drain cocks.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has
reached the drain.
Z Only use suitable cleaning agents as sold by the specialist trade.
Z Collect any emerging mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct disposal.
Care
12
203Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has
reached the drain.
Close all water taps.
Flush the toilet several times.
Allow the cleaning agent to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and cleaning agent for
correct disposal.
For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again sev-
eral times over.
12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system
Empty the water system.
Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
Fill mixture of water and disinfectant into the water tank. Observe the manufac-
turer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
Open the drain cocks one by one.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the respective drain.
Close the drain cocks.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the drain.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the drain.
Close all water taps.
Flush the toilet several times.
Allow the disinfectant to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and disinfectant for cor-
rect disposal.
For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again sev-
eral times over.
Z Only use suitable disinfectants as sold by the specialist trade.
Z Collect any emerging mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.
Care
12
204 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12.4 Extractor hood
Clean the grease filter of the range hood occasionally. How often cleaning is neces-
sary depends on how often the range hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter
until the performance of the range hood has noticeably decreased.
Cleaning grease filter:
Remove the lower cover.
Remove the filter.
Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.
Let the filter dry completely and re-install it.
Put the cover back on and secure it with the two screws.
Replacing the charcoal filter:
Remove the lower and the middle cover.
Remove the used charcoal filter.
Insert the new charcoal filter.
Put the covers back on and secure them with the two screws.
12.5 Toilets
If the toilet will not be used for a longer period of time, for example for Winter lay
up, the toilet must be cleaned and completely emptied.
12.5.1 Toilet with separate water tank
Emptying the tank:
Press the flush button, to active the operating panel.
Open the sliding trap and flush until no more water flows.
Close the sliding trap.
Empty the cassette (Fig. 249,2) at a disposal station authorized for this purpose
and clean it.
Leave the drainage neck (Fig. 249,3) open.
Remove the drain hose (Fig. 249,5) from the holder (Fig. 249,4).
Place a sufficiently large container under the drain hose.
Remove the drain plug (Fig. 249,1) and let the residual water run out.
When no more water flows out, place the drain plug in the drain hose.
Replace the drain hose in the holder.
X Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Fig. 249 Toilet water tank drain hose
Care
12
205Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12.5.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Emptying valve:
Empty the entire water system.
Press the toilet pedal several times, until no more water flows.
Empty the cassette at a disposal station authorized for this purpose and clean it.
Turn off power supply.
Remove cover (Fig. 250,3).
Unscrew the cap (Fig. 250,2).
Place a suitable container under the valve (Fig. 250,1).
Press the pedal several times until water no longer comes out of the valve.
Screw the cap back on and attach cover.
12.6 Winter care
De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We rec-
ommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime. Mechan-
ical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular strain, and
should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.
12.6.1 Preparations
Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as necessary.
Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation
system and the heater.
Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody.
Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.
Z A backflow preventer is installed above the valve. The backflow preventer hin-
ders water from running out of the valve. Press the pedal until no more water
runs out.
Fig. 250 Vacuum toilet valve
Z If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 °C. Switch the
circulation fan (if there is one) to automatic. In the case of extreme external tem-
peratures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly open. The
inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes, for example,
and counteract the formation of condensation in the storage spaces.
Z If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with winter
insulation mats.
Care
12
206 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12.6.2 Winter operation
During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied
under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and avoid
vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.
When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and roof
storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures optimal
ventilation.
In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp
areas.
12.6.3 At the end of the winter season
Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this is
done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are
removed.
Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.
12.7 Lay-up
12.7.1 Temporary lay-up
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle. This
is especially true if the animal remains undisturbed in a parked vehicle.
The animals can get into the vehicle at an opportune moment and hide from view.
To keep damages from animals to a minimum or to avoid them altogether, regu-
larly check the vehicle for damage or animal traces. This is especially important
approx. 24 hours after parking the car in storage.
If animal traces are found, contact your authorised dealer or service centre. If
damage to cables has occurred, they can result in short circuits. The vehicle could
catch fire.
Z If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off.
X If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have
the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
X Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.
X Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!
Care
12
207Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the fuel
tank system
Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move vehicle
every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occurring on tyres
and wheel bearings
Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of formation of
cracks!
Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure
Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area
Z Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film
may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.
In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base vehicle
Body
All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other open-
ings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This prevents
animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry
Air the interior, all storage compartments accessible from the outside,
and the parking space (e.g. garage) every 3 weeks in order to prevent the
occurrence of condensation and resulting mould formation
Interior
Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover
Clean refrigerator
Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly
open
Search for traces of animals that have gained entry
Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove it
from the vehicle
Gas system
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle
Close all gas isolator taps
Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if
they are empty
Electrical system
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Z Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply
Care
12
208 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12.7.2 Winter lay-up
Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:
Water system
Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the wa-
ter pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave
the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Ob-
serve the notes in chapter 11
Switch off the safety/drainage valve on the transformer/rectifier. Other-
wise the battery will become discharged too quickly
Z If the safety/drainage valve is switched off, the water system is
no longer sufficiently protected against frost.
Activities Done
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or pro-
tect with varnish
Fill fuel tank with winter diesel
Check antifreeze in the cooling water
Rectify damage to the paintwork
Body
Keep the forced ventilation open
Clean and lubricate the mounted steady legs
Clean and grease all door and flap hinges
Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms
Rub all rubber seals with talc
Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders
Interior
Position de-humidifiers
Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place
Air the interior every 3 weeks
Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and
drawers
Thoroughly clean the interior
If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle
Electrical system
Remove starter and living area batteries and store in a place protected
from frost (see chapter 9)
Water system
Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised store
Complete vehicle
Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings are
not covered, or use porous tarpaulins
Care
12
209Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-up
over winter
Go through the following checklist before start-up:
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Check the tyre pressure on all tyres
Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel
Body
Clean the pivot bearing of the entrance step
Check the functioning of the fitted steady legs
Check that the doors, windows and skylights are working properly
Check the function of all external locks
Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is one)
Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)
Gas system
Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and connect
to the gas pressure regulator
Electrical system
Connect to 240 V power supply using the external socket
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Z Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.
Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply (see
chapter 9)
Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, socket
and all installed electrical appliances
Water system
Disinfect water pipes and water tank
Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water tank
Close safety/drainage valve (if there is one), drain cocks and water taps
Check the safety/drainage valve, water taps, drain cocks and water dis-
tributors for leaks
Appliances
Check the function of the refrigerator
Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years
Check the function of the heater/boiler
Check the function of the gas cooker
Check the function of the air conditioning unit
Care
12
210 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Maintenance
13
211Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13Maintenance
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work con-
cerning the vehicle.
The maintenance instructions address the following topics:
z Alde hot-water heater
z independent vehicle heater
z air conditioning unit
z replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
z AL-KO rear axle
At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain
spare parts.
13.1 Inspection work
Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular intervals.
This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel.
Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of this
instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel with this technical knowl-
edge are available for assistance at all authorised dealers and service centres. Their
experience and regular technical instruction by the factory as well as equipment
and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspection of the vehicle.
The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.
Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer service
booklet.
13.2 Maintenance work
As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre-
quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation and
use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the vehicle
more often.
Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified in the
corresponding instruction manuals.
Z Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them carried
out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus preserved.
Z The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in the
event of damage and guarantee claims.
Maintenance
13
212 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.3 Alde hot-water heater
13.3.1 Checking the fluid level
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 251,3) and "MAX"
(Fig. 251,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 251).
13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid
Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Unscrew or pull off the panel.
Open the rotary lid (Fig. 251,1) on the compensator reservoir.
Slowly remove cover with circulating pump upwards.
Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection content
must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 °C.
Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.
Z Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir.
Z During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling level
may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the heating fluid.
Z We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater operation
and to check the glycol content.
Z Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at inter-
vals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after some
time.
Z Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mixture
offers frost protection up to approx. -25 °C. When topping up hot-water heaters
that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe the instruc-
tions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.
Z Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 251 Compensator reservoir hot-
water heater
Z The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator reservoir
is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark.
Maintenance
13
213Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system
The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Open bleeding valve (Fig. 252,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.
Close bleeding valve.
Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves.
Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.
13.4 Independent vehicle heater
Use the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with a
cold engine and smallest fan settings.
Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater checked by
an authorised specialist workshop.
13.5 Air conditioning unit
Fig. 252 Bleeding valve of hot-water
heater
X Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Z Never operate the air conditioning unit without a lint filter. Without a lint filter,
the vaporiser becomes dirty and the capacity of the air conditioning unit is con-
sequently impaired.
Z Condensation can enter the vehicle if the condensation drain is clogged up.
Keep the condensation drain free from dirt, leaves and similar.
Maintenance
13
214 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.5.1 Air conditioning unit Truma
A lint filter (Fig. 253,1) for the air circulation suction system is at the front of the air
conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least twice a
year however, and replaced if necessary.
The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose free
from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
13.5.2 Air conditioning unit (Teleco)
A lint filter (Fig. 254,1) for the air circulation suction system is located at the rear of
the air conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least
twice a year however, and replaced if necessary.
Pull the lint filter out of the air conditioning unit, clean it or replace it if necessary.
The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose free
from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
Fig. 253 Air conditioning unit (Truma)
Fig. 254 Lint filter air conditioning unit
1
Maintenance
13
215Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
13.6.1 Halogen spotlight (with glass shade)
Changing bulbs: Pull the halogen bulb (Fig. 255,1) forward out of the socket.
Press the new halogen bulb into the fitting between the two spring tongues.
13.6.2 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Changing bulbs:
Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 256,1).
Carefully remove the lamp chalice (Fig. 256,2) from the holder.
Remove halogen bulb.
X Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool
down before changing bulbs.
X Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 240 V fuse box before
changing bulbs.
X Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children.
X Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its
glass. The bulb might burst.
X Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be
a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard!
Z A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing
the new bulb.
Z Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage.
Z If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.
Fig. 255 Halogen spotlight (with glass
shade)
1
Fig. 256 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Maintenance
13
216 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.3 Room lamp
Changing bulbs:
Unscrew the cap (Fig. 257,1).
Remove cover (Fig. 257,2).
Press the light covering (Fig. 257,3) lightly together and remove it.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.4 Living area lamp
Changing bulbs:
Remove the screw (Fig. 258,1) and take off the cover (Fig. 258,2).
Press the glass together gently and remove from the housing.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 257 Room lamp
Fig. 258 Living area lamp
21
Maintenance
13
217Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.6.5 Recessed halogen light with housing
The recessed halogen light is installed flush in a housing (Fig. 259,1).
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 259,3) from the housing.
Remove the cover ring with the glass.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 259,2).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.6 Recessed halogen light (flat)
The recessed halogen light (Fig. 260,1) is installed flush.
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 261,1) from the housing.
Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ring with the glass (Fig. 261,2) from the
lower section of the recessed halogen light.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 261,3).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 259 Recessed halogen light
Fig. 260 Recessed halogen light (flat) Fig. 261 Changing the halogen bulb
Maintenance
13
218 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.6.7 Surface-mounted halogen light driver's cabin (model I)
Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out and remove the
glass cover (Fig. 262,1).
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.8 Range hood light
Changing bulbs:
Remove the lower and the middle cover.
Remove the halogen bulb carefully from the holder.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Put the covers back on and secure them with the two screws.
13.6.9 Wardrobe light
Changing bulbs:
Press the light covering (Fig. 263,1) lightly together and remove it.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 262 Surface-mounted halogen light
driver's cabin (model I)
Fig. 263 Wardrobe light
1 2
Maintenance
13
219Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.7 Changing the battery of the wardrobe light with LED
The wardrobe light has a button cell that supplies voltage to the LED.
Changing the batteries:
Push the cover (Fig. 263,2) in the direction of the arrow.
Take the button cell out of the battery holder.
Insert new button cell of the same type (+/-), observing the correct polarity.
Push the cover (Fig. 263,2) back on.
13.8 AL-KO rear axle
Fiat vehicles with AL-KO
rear axle without
pneumatic spring
In addition to the regulations and notes in the operator manual of the basic vehicle
as well as in the maintenance manual, the rear axles must be relubricated after
20,000 km, or at least every 12 months.
The lubricator nipples (Fig. 264, arrow) are situated on the underside of the axle
tube.
Z Use only button cells of the same type.
Z The rear axles must not bear any load while they are being lubricated.
Z Use one of the following types of grease for lubrication:
Costrac GL 1501 by the firm Klüber
Cardex 3746 SP by the firm CONDA
Z If the vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free torsion bar spring axle or a
rear axle with pneumatic cushioning, the two lubricator nipples are left out.
Fig. 264 AL-KO rear axle
Maintenance
13
220 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.9 Spare parts
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with man-
ufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare part.
These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an authorised spe-
cialist workshop. The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any
spare parts requirement.
Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:
z Fuses
z V-belt
z Windscreen blades
z Bulbs
z Water pump (submerged pump)
When ordering spare parts, please indicate the serial number and the vehicle type
to the authorised dealer or service centre.
The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory
standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use. When fit-
ting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in the vehicle
documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. The authorised dealer or
service centre will be happy to advise you.
X Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behav-
iour and jeopardize road safety.
X The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by
Dethleffs have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle. These
products are available at the authorised dealers or service centres. The
authorised dealers and service centres are informed about admissible tech-
nical details and carry out the required work correctly.
X The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may cause
damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report,
a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee
for the proper quality of the product.
X No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not
been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alterations to
the vehicle.
Maintenance
13
221Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
13.10 Vehicle identification plate
The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 265) with the serial number is fitted on the B
column on the front passenger side (models T and A) or in the entrance area
(models I).
Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:
z Identifies the vehicle
z Helps with the procurement of spare parts
z Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner
13.11 Warning and information stickers
There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning and
information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.
Fig. 265 Vehicle identification plate
1 Type
2 Maximum permissible gross weight of
the vehicle with trailer
3 Manufacturer of the unit (add-on unit)
4 Manufacturer's code and chassis
number
5 EG type approval number
6 Permissible rear axle load (for tandem
axle)
7 Permissible axle load rear
8 Permissible axle load front
9 Maximum permissible gross weight of
the vehicle
10 Serial number
Fig. 266 Cover for chassis number (Fiat
base vehicle)
Z Always include the serial number with all inquiries for the customer service
office.
Z For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the chassis number is located behind a cover
(Fig. 266,1) in the entrance on the front passenger's side.
1
Z Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a service
centre.
Maintenance
13
222 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Wheels and tyres
14
223Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
14Wheels and tyres
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
z tyre selection
z handling of tyres
z changing wheels
z spare wheel support
z tyre pressure
At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre pres-
sure for your vehicle.
14.1 General
Observe: Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth and
external damage.
Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by law
is reached.
Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer and
winter tyres).
Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The permitted rim and
tyre sizes are quoted in the vehicle documents and the authorised dealer or
service centre will always be glad to give you advice.
Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only then do
they reach full strength.
X Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure
causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can
lose control of the vehicle.
Z Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
Z Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in these
tyres.
Z Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.
Z Depending on the base vehicle and model the vehicles are equipped with only
one tyre repair kit as standard.
Z In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle safe with
a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights.
Z Tyres on vehicles with tandem axles may wear faster.
Z Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle over
time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date of manu-
facture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits the year of
manufacture.
Example: Week 15, year of manufacture 2009.
Wheels and tyres
14
224 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re-tighten
the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise (Fig. 267) after
50 km (30 miles).
When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel
bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to 3,000 miles).
For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings free
from pressure points:
Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the vehicle
every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is changed.
14.2 Tyre selection
The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or can
be obtained from the authorised dealers or service centres. Each tyre must fit the
vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external dimensions (diameter,
width), which are indicated with the standardised size designations. In addition,
the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle with regard to weight and
speed.
Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed on
two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its load
index (= LI, load index code).
The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also important
for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with full load-car-
rying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together, load index and
speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official component of the
complete, standardised dimensions description which appears on every tyre. The
information on the tyres must correspond to the specifications which appear in the
vehicle papers.
Fig. 267 Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel
bolts cross-wise
X A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause it to
burst.
Z If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type approval
for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can lapse. The author-
ised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.
Wheels and tyres
14
225Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
14.3 Tyre specifications
14.4 Handling of tyres
Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may get
pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and result in
it getting ruptured.
Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may get
pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage the tyre
and result in it getting ruptured.
Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers signif-
icantly increases wear.
If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked.
Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to a sig-
nificant increase in wear.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of varying
strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unservice-
able.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer serious
damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.
Drive in such a way as to protect your tyres. Avoid braking sharply, revving up
too strongly and long journeys on poor roads.
14.5 Changing wheels
Description Explanation
215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q
215 Tyre width in mm
70 Height-to-width proportion in percent
R Tyre design (R = radial)
15 Rim diameter in inches
C Commercial (transporter)
109 Load index code for single tyres
107 Load index code for twin tyres
Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)
X The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping.
X Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to "P"
position.
X Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel with
the wheel chocks.
X Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports.
X If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle.
X Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circumstances
on the bodywork.
X Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is specified
on the vehicle jack's identification plate.
Wheels and tyres
14
226 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
14.6 Spare wheel support
The spare wheel is found on the underside of the vehicle in a basket which can be
opened from the outside.
14.7 Tyre pressure
The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pressure.
Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres.
As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate of
0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst, check
the tyre pressure regularly.
X Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the tyre.
X Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up.
X Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down under
it.
Z Do not damage the thread of the thread bolts when changing the wheel.
Z Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 267).
Z When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres), use
the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. The firm seating of the
wheels and the function of the braking system depend on this.
Z Wheel rims and tyres not permitted for use with the vehicle can jeopardize road
safety.
Z Do not replace wheels cross-wise.
Z Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard
warning triangle.
Z Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre load
and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre sizes stated
in the vehicle documents.
Z Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base vehicle.
Z For models with a Fiat base vehicle, there is no spare wheel. For these vehicles,
a tyre repair kit is included for inflating the flat tyre with foam.
X Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious tyre
damage.
X Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure
causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can
lose control of the vehicle.
X Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.
Z Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
Wheels and tyres
14
227Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is pos-
sible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case, the
Dethleffs dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.
Z The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehicles.
Z Pressure in hot tyres is higher than in cold tyres. Therefore, check the pressure
when the tyres are cold.
Z Tyre pressures in bar.
Z The valve used must be approved for the air pressure. We recommend the use
of a metal valve for pressures greater than 4.75 bar.
Z For the maximum permissible axle loads for your vehicle please refer to specific
documentation.
Z When a replacement is needed, Dethleffs recommends "Camping" tyres.
Types Tyre size Front air
pressure in
bar
Rear air pres-
sure in bar
Fiat
All types 215/70 R 15 C
(109/107) Q
4.25 4.5
All types with "Camping"
tyres
215/70 R 15 C
(109/107) Q
4.75 5.5
All types 225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) R
4.5 5.0
All types with "Camping"
tyres
225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) R
4.75 5.5
All types 225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) Q
(tandem axle)
4.5 3.5
All types with "Camping"
tyres
225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) Q
(tandem axle)
5.5 3.5
Wheels and tyres
14
228 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Troubleshooting
15
229Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15Troubleshooting
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle.
The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies.
The instructions address the following topics:
z braking system
z electrical system
z gas system
z gas cooker
z gas oven
z microwave oven
z heater
z boiler
z refrigerator
z air conditioning unit
z water supply
z toilet
z body
The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great deal of
specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this instruction
manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist workshop must find and
eliminate the cause of the fault.
15.1 Braking system
15.2 Electrical system
X Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an authorised
specialist workshop.
Z When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type.
Z See chapter 9 for changing the fuses.
Fault Cause Remedy
Road light system does no
longer work correctly
Bulb is defective Replace bulb. Note volts
and watts specifications
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Interior lighting does not
work
Bulb is defective Replace bulb. Note volts
and watts specifications
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
The electrically operated
entrance step cannot be
moved in or out
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Troubleshooting
15
230 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
No 240 V power supply de-
spite connection
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged when
operated in 240 V mode
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the starter or living area
battery is defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse (40
A) on the starter or living
area battery
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
Living area battery is not
charged during vehicle op-
eration
Fuse on terminal D+ of the
alternator is defective
Replace fuse
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
12 V indicator lamp does
not light up
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power supply
on
Battery cut-off switch on
the transformer/rectifier is
switched off
Set battery cut-off switch
to on
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or living
area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
Flat fuse (2 A) in the living
area battery is defective
Replace flat fuse (2 A) in
the living area battery
No display on the panel 12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power supply
on
Living area battery discon-
nected from the 12 V pow-
er supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V pow-
er supply
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or living
area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
12 V power supply does
not work
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power supply
on
Living area battery discon-
nected from the 12 V pow-
er supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V pow-
er supply
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charging the living area
battery
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the living area battery is
defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse (40
A) on the living area bat-
tery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Troubleshooting
15
231Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
12 V power supply does
not work in 240 V opera-
tion
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power supply
on
Living area battery discon-
nected from the 12 V pow-
er supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V pow-
er supply
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Contact customer service
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the living area battery is
defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse (40
A) on the living area bat-
tery
Starter battery is dis-
charged in 12 V operation
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
Living area battery discon-
nected from the 12 V pow-
er supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V pow-
er supply
No voltage is supplied by
the living area battery
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charge living area battery
immediately
Z Total discharge
damages the
battery.
If the vehicle is to be laid
up for a long period, fully
charge the living area bat-
tery beforehand
Extractor hood does not
work
240 V automatic circuit
breaker is switched off
Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
12 V supply device
switched off
Switch on 12 V supply de-
vice on the panel
Power pack is defective Contact customer service
Fuse (15 A) on the 240 V
fuse box is defective
Replace fuse (15 A)
Fuse (15 A) at the trans-
former/rectifier is defective
Replace fuse (15 A)
Extractor hood defective Contact customer service
Air conditioning unit can-
not be switched on or off
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
Remote control battery is
empty
Change remote control
battery
Fault Cause Remedy
Troubleshooting
15
232 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.3 Gas system
15.4 Cooker
15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven
X In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there
is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle immediately.
Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
X If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames,
and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
X Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist work-
shop.
Fault Cause Remedy
No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle
Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap
Regulator tap on the gas
bottle is closed
Open regulator tap on the
gas bottle
External temperature is too
low (-42 °C for propane
gas, 0 °C for butane gas)
Wait for higher external
temperatures
Built-in appliance is defec-
tive
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Ignition fuse does not op-
erate (flame does not burn
after the control knobs are
released)
Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob pressed
for approx. 15 to
20 seconds after ignition
Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service
Flame extinguishes when
being reduced to its mini-
mum setting
Thermocouple sensor is in-
correctly set
Correctly reset thermocou-
ple sensor (do not bend).
The sensor tip should pro-
trude by 5 mm beyond the
burner. The sensor neck
should not be more than
3 mm away from the burn-
er ring; if necessary, con-
tact customer service
Troubleshooting
15
233Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.4.2 Microwave oven
15.5 Heater/boiler
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the rele-
vant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompa-
nying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair
the appliance.
15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma
X Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs
can cause major risks to the user.
Fault Cause Remedy
Microwave oven does not
cut in
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Door of the microwave
oven is not properly closed
Remove foreign bodies
stuck in the door of the mi-
crowave oven and close
door properly
Fault Cause Remedy
Heater does not ignite Temperature sensor on op-
erating unit or remote sen-
sor defective
Pull out plug on operating
unit. The heating then
works without thermostat.
Contact the customer serv-
ice as soon as possible
Red indicator lamp "Fault"
illuminates
Air in the gas pipe system Switch off and on again.
After two futile ignition at-
tempts, wait for
10 minutes before trying
again
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Defect of a safety element Contact customer service
Red indicator lamp "Fault"
is flashing
Operating voltage too low Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have it
charged or replaced)
Green indicator lamp be-
hind knob is not lit
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Fuse in the electronic con-
trol unit has been trig-
gered
Contact customer service
Living area battery defec-
tive
Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have it
charged or replaced)
Yellow indicator lamp on
the energy selector switch
does not illuminate
No supply voltage Check 240 V connection
and fuses
Overheating switch was
triggered
Press overheating switch
Troubleshooting
15
234 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler
Boiler empties, safety/
drainage valve has opened
Internal temperature be-
low 8 °C
Heat inside
Safety/drainage valve sep-
arated from battery supply
Cancel battery separation.
In order to do this switch
on the battery cut-off
switch on the transformer/
rectifier or deactivate the
battery separation via the
panel
Operating voltage below
10.8 V
Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have it
charged or replaced)
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Safety/drainage valve does
not close when switching
on
Safety/drainage valve sep-
arated from battery supply
Cancel battery separation.
In order to do this switch
on the battery cut-off
switch on the transformer/
rectifier or deactivate the
battery separation via the
panel
Operating voltage below
10.8 V
Charge living area battery
(or have it charged)
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Red and green indicator
lamps are not lit
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Fan wheel runs noisily or
not steadily
Fan wheel is soiled Contact Truma service de-
partment
Z If a fault occurs in the system, the cause is shown on the display.
Fault Cause Remedy
Heater does not ignite with
gas operation
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Heater does not ignite Battery voltage too low Charge battery. If the bat-
tery voltage rises above
11 V, the heater is switched
on automatically
Heater does not ignite at
240 V electrical operation
No 240 V power supply Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
Connect 240 V power sup-
ply
Fault Cause Remedy
Troubleshooting
15
235Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.6 Refrigerator
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the rele-
vant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompa-
nying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair
the appliance.
15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES
Heater switches off Overheating Allow the heater to cool.
To reset the display, inter-
rupt the 12 V power supply
to the heater and switch it
back on again
Heater running, but no
heat at the convectors
Circulating pump does not
work
Switch on room thermo-
stat
Contact customer service
Heater and circulating
pump running, but no heat
at the convectors
Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater
Fault Cause Remedy
Fault Cause Remedy
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in 240 V mode
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power sup-
ply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power sup-
ply checked by an author-
ised specialist workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in 12 V mode
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) in
the starter battery is defec-
tive
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) in the starter battery
Flat fuse (2 A) in the starter
battery is defective
Replace flat fuse (2 A) in
the starter battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage too
low
Have the 12 V power sup-
ply checked by an author-
ised specialist workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in gas mode
The "GAS" operating indi-
cator flashes yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Air in the gas pipe Repeat ignition 3 or
4 times
Cobwebs or burnt residue
in the burning chamber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the burn-
ing chamber
Troubleshooting
15
236 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES (error diagnostics)
Error code Cause Remedy
1 The 240 V power supply is
75 % under the required oper-
ating voltage
Contact customer service
2 The 12 V power supply is 75 %
under the required operating
voltage
Contact customer service
3 The refrigerator is operated at
240 V, even though no 240 V
mode has been selected
Contact customer service
4 The refrigerator is operated at
12 V, even though no 12 V
mode has been selected
Contact customer service
5 The refrigerator is operated in
gas operation mode even
though gas operation mode
has not been selected
Contact customer service
6 The gas valve has been identi-
fied as open even though it
should be closed
Contact customer service
7 The gas valve has been identi-
fied as closed even though it
should be open
Contact customer service
8 The 240 V power supply is
20 % under the required oper-
ating voltage
Check 240 V power supply
9 The gas supply has been cut
off. The flame has not been ig-
nited within 30 seconds in gas
operation mode
z Check the gas supply
z Repeat ignition 3 to 4 times
z Contact customer service
10 The refrigerator is set to 12 V
mode and the vehicle engine
is not running
Start the vehicle engine or se-
lect a different energy source
11 The refrigerator is set to "AU-
TO" mode and no energy
source is available
Provide an energy source and
reset the refrigerator. Switch
the refrigerator off and on
again for this purpose
12 – Contact customer service
13 The temperature sensor is de-
fective
Check whether the plug is in-
serted properly above the fin
inside the refrigerator. If so:
Contact customer service
14 The connection between oper-
ating controls and control de-
vice is interrupted
Contact customer service
Troubleshooting
15
237Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series with AES
Fault Cause Remedy
Indicator lamps "230 V",
"12 V" or "AUTO" are not lit
green
Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigerator
with energy selector
switch
No electrical operating
voltage
Connect 240 V power sup-
ply
Let the vehicle engine run
Switch on or replace the
fuse
Contact a specialist work-
shop
Refrigerator does not
switch to 12 V mode dur-
ing the journey
Operating voltage of alter-
nator is not present/too
low
Contact a specialist work-
shop
Refrigerator does not
switch on in gas opera-
tion, "GAS" indicator lamp
is not lit yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt residue
in the burning chamber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the burn-
ing chamber
"GAS" indicator lamp flash-
es yellow, no gas
Air in the gas pipe Switch off the refrigerator
with energy selector
switch
Open regulator tap on the
gas bottle and the gas iso-
lator tap of the refrigerator
Switch on the refrigerator
with energy selector
switch. After 10 seconds,
the AES will attempt an-
other ignition
If the "GAS" indicator lamp
flashes yellow again after
approx. 30 seconds, the
failure has not been reme-
died yet
Repeat this process two to
three times for ventilation.
If the refrigerator cannot
be operated, contact cus-
tomer services
Troubleshooting
15
238 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.6.4 Dometic 8 series with MES
15.6.5 Dometic 8 series with AES
Z In the case of a fault the LED display fault will always light up " ".
Fault Cause Remedy
LED " " flashes No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power sup-
ply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power sup-
ply checked by an author-
ised specialist workshop
LED " " flashes Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage too
low
Have the 12 V power sup-
ply checked by an author-
ised specialist workshop
LED " " flashes
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt residue
in the burning chamber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the burn-
ing chamber
LEDs for display of the
temperature range flash
Temperature sensor defec-
tive
Contact customer service
LED " " and LEDs for dis-
play of the temperature
range flash
240 V heater element de-
fective
Contact customer service
LED " " and LEDs for dis-
play of the temperature
range flash
12 V heater element defec-
tive
Contact customer service
Z In the case of a fault the LED display fault will always light up " ".
Fault Cause Remedy
Text "230 V" flashes No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power sup-
ply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V auto-
matic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power sup-
ply checked by an author-
ised specialist workshop
Troubleshooting
15
239Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.7 Air conditioning unit
Text "12 V" flashes Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is de-
fective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage too
low
Have the 12 V power sup-
ply checked by an author-
ised specialist workshop
Text "GAS" flashes Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt residue
in the burning chamber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the burn-
ing chamber
LEDs for display of the
temperature range flash
Temperature sensor defec-
tive
Contact customer service
Text "HE1" flashes 240 V heater element de-
fective
Contact customer service
Text "HE2" flashes 12 V heater element defec-
tive
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does
not cool
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power sup-
ply
Fuse is defective Check fuse and replace if
necessary
Temperature below 16 °C
Temperature has been set
incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Air filter contaminated Replace air filter
Fault Cause Remedy
Troubleshooting
15
240 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.8 Water supply
Fault Cause Remedy
Leakage water inside the
vehicle
A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect
water pipes
No water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water
Drain cock not closed Close drain cock
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power supply
on
Fuse of the water pump is
defective
Replace fuse on the trans-
former/rectifier
Water pump defective Exchange water pump
(have it exchanged)
Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or
replace
Transformer/rectifier de-
fective
Contact customer service
Water pump switched off
on panel
Switch water pump on
Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water
Fuse for toilet is defective Replace fuse
Display for water and
waste water indicates a
wrong value
Measuring probe in the
waste water or water tank
is soiled
Clean water/waste water
tank
Measuring probe is defec-
tive
Replace measuring probe
Waste water tank cannot
be emptied
Drain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap on
the waste water tank and
drain the waste water.
Rinse the waste water tank
well
Drain on the single lever
mixer tap is clogged
Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de-cal-
cify in vinegar water (only
for products made from
metal)
Water jets on the shower
nozzle clogged
Water jets calcified De-calcify shower nozzle in
vinegar water (only for
products made from met-
al) or rub off soft nozzle
burling
Water drains from the
shower tray slowly or does
not drain at all
The vehicle is not in a hori-
zontal position
Position the vehicle hori-
zontally
Milkiness of the water Tank filled with dirty water Clean water tank mechani-
cally and chemically; then
disinfect and rinse copi-
ously with drinking water
Residues in the water tank
or water system
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemically;
then disinfect and rinse co-
piously with drinking wa-
ter
Troubleshooting
15
241Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Any change in the taste or
odour of the water
Tank filled with dirty water Clean water system me-
chanically and chemically;
then disinfect and rinse co-
piously with drinking wa-
ter
Fuel filled into the water
tank by mistake
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemically;
then disinfect and rinse co-
piously with drinking wa-
ter. If not successful:
Contact a specialist work-
shop
Microbiological deposits in
the water system
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemically;
then disinfect and rinse co-
piously with drinking wa-
ter
Deposits in the water tank
and/or water-carrying
components
Water excessively long in
the water tank and in wa-
ter-carrying components
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemically;
then disinfect and rinse co-
piously with drinking wa-
ter
Fault Cause Remedy
Water does not remain in
toilet bowl
Seal dirty or defective Clean seal or have replaced
Water does not flow prop-
erly into the toilet bowl
Water pressure too low Contact customer service
Water is entering the vehi-
cle
Hose connection loosened Check connections for
proper seat and tighten
hose clamps
Vacuum pump does not
run
No power present Control power supply (or
have checked)
Vacuum pump runs too of-
ten
Cap or connection not
sealed tightly
Check connections be-
tween toilet and vacuum
(or have checked)
Toilet clogged Improper used Remove blockage
Fault Cause Remedy
Troubleshooting
15
242 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
15.10 Body
Fault Cause Remedy
Flap hinges/door hinges
are difficult to operate
Flap/door hinges are not
sufficiently lubricated
Lubricate flap hinges/door
hinges with acid-free and
resin-free grease
Hinges/joints in the bath-
room unit/toilet compart-
ment are difficult to
operate/make a grating
noise
Hinges/joints are not suffi-
ciently lubricated
Lubricate hinges/joints
with solvent-free and acid-
free grease
Z Spray cans often
contain solvents
Storage compartment
hinges are difficult to oper-
ate/make a grating noise
Storage compartment
hinges are not sufficiently
lubricated
Lubricate storage com-
partment hinges with acid-
free and resin-free grease
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is difficult to operate
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is not (sufficiently) lu-
bricated
Lubricate front bonnet
swivel system with acid-
free and resin-free grease
Heki skylight difficult to
operate
Threaded spindle not lubri-
cated
Lubricate threaded spindle
Threaded spindle defective Have threaded spindle re-
placed
Z The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts
requirement.
Special equipment
16
243Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
16Special equipment
16.1 Weight details for special equipment
Weight details for Dethleffs special equipment are listed in the table below. If these
objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the standard
equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating the payload.
All weight details are approximate.
Observe the max. permissible gross weight.
X The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may cause
damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report,
a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee
for the proper quality of the product.
X Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behav-
iour and jeopardize road safety.
X No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not
been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alterations to
the vehicle.
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Waste water tank, insulated 2
Overcab bed, foldable 2
Alcove window, hinged 2
Caravan coupling 26-46
Hinged window, driver's cabin 8
External shower 1
Outside kitchen 10
Outside storage compartment (lowered rear) 59-63
Outside storage compartment (storage compartment) 3
Automatic transmission 17-32
Car radio and CD 2
Oven 14
Chassis package (driver's cabin air conditioning unit, air-
bags)
23-27
Skylight (clear glass) 1
Skylight (Midi-Heki) 10
Roof rail 10
Roof rack with aluminium ladder 7-17
"Kissenschlacht" (pillow fight) decoration package 1
Swivel console, seat 20
Extractor hood 2-5
Duo switching facility (incl. gas bottle) 26
Entrance step, electrical 2
Driver's cabin carpet 3
Driver's cabin door 17
Bike rack for 3 bicycles 9
Special equipment
16
244 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Bike rack for 4 bicycles 10
Roman shades, driver's cabin 3
Fire extinguisher 6 kg 8
Flat screen 4-6
Floor warming unit, electrical 9
External gas socket 1
Holder for flat screen 3-5
Lift-tilt skylight (Heki 3) 12-15
Trumatic C 6002 heater, electric kit 2
Insect screen door 3
Insulation mat for driver's cabin window 2
Air conditioning unit 32-40
Refrigerator, separate freezer compartment 7-20
Awning 300 cm 21
Awning 350 cm 25-35
Awning 400 cm 27-40
Awning 450 cm 32
Awning 500 cm 36
Awning 600 cm 40
Microwave oven 15
Motorcycle rack/bike rack 40
Navigation system (with cables) 9
Guest bed 3-5
Pilot seats 20
Crossbeam, roof rail 7
Radio preparation 4
Wheel trims 4
Smoke alarm 1
Reversing camera, incl. monitor and cables 5-10
Diesel particulate filter 10
Satellite unit 15-24
Switch for water pump 1
Coil springs, front, reinforced 5
Service flap 3-8
Safety kit 5
Seat covers in the driver's cabin and living area 3
Solar installation 15
Voltage transformer, air conditioning unit 3
Supports (2 pieces) 6-10
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Special equipment
16
245Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Chain-stitch rug, laid loosely 6-9
Table leg, free-standing 5
Sill 8
Panelling, inside 2
Awning light 1
Alde hot-water heater 30-50
Hazard warning triangle and first-aid kit 2
Alde heat exchanger 2-5
Winter covering for the refrigerator grating 1
Winter comfort package (depending on equipment) 15-75
Auxiliary battery 27
Additional heater, driver's cabin (independent vehicle
heater)
7
Auxiliary lamps, inside 2
Additional pump for the Alde heater 1
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona) 3
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Special equipment
16
246 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Helpful notes
17
247Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
17Helpful notes
Chapter overview
This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
z road assistance in European countries
z traffic rules in European countries
z gas supply in European countries
z toll regulations in European countries
z safe ways to spend the night during travel
z camping in winter
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important equip-
ment for the journey.
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries
Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law applies in
case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following rules when trav-
elling abroad:
z Take the green insurance card with you.
z Always register accidents with the police.
z Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.
17.2 Help on Europe's roads
Z The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the coun-
tries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your automo-
bile club or embassy for further information.
Z In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the
vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.
Country Emergency
services
Police
Breakdown service
Belgium 112
112
TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77
Bulgaria 150
166
UAB (02) 9 80 33 08/146
1)
Denmark 112
free of charge
112
free of charge
Falck 79 42 42 42
Germany 112
110
ADAC 22 22 22
1)
Estonia 112
110/112
1)
EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88
1)
Finland 112
112
Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00
France
15/112
1)
17/112
1)
Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22
AIT-Assistance 0800 08 92 22
Helpful notes
17
248 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Greece 112
171/112
1)
ELPA 104 00
Great Britain 112
112
AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18/
(08 00) 82 82 82
1)
Ireland
999/112
1)
999/112
1)
AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88
Iceland 112
112
F.I.B 5 11 21 12
Italy
118/112
1)
112
ACI 803 116/8 00 11 68 00
1)
Croatia
94/112
1)
92/112
1)
HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87
1)
Latvia
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAMB 8 00 00 00
Lithuania
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88
1)
Luxembourg 112
113/112
1)
ACL 2 60 00
Macedonia 194
192
AMSM 196
Montenegro 94
92
AMSCG 9807
Netherlands 112
112
ANWB 08 82 69 28 88
Norway 113
112
NAF 81 00 05 05
Austria
144/112
1)
133/112
1)
ÖAMTC 120
Poland
999/112
1)
997/112
1)
PZM 022 5 32 84 33
Portugal 112
112
ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03
ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01
Romania
961/112
1)
955/112
1)
ACR (021) 2 22 22 22/
(021) 2 22 15 53
1)
Russia 03
02
RAS (4 95) 7 47 66 66
Sweden 112
112
M 0 20 91 29 12
Country Emergency
services
Police
Breakdown service
Helpful notes
17
249Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Date 03/2007
Specifications without guarantee
Switzerland 144
117/112
1)
TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11
1)
Serbia 94
92
AMSS (011) 19800
Slovakia
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
SATC 1 81 24
Slovenia 112
113
AMZS (1) 9 87/
(003861) 5 30 53 53
1)
Spain 061
112
RACE 9 15 93 33 33
Czech Republic
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
UAMK CR 12 30
Turkey 112
155/112
1)
TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40
Ukraine 03
02
112 UA (8-032) 2 97 81 12
Hungary
104/112
1)
107/112
1)
MAK
1 88/(0036-1) 13 45 17 44
1)
Cyprus 112
112
AA 02 22 31 31 31
1)
In the mobile communication network
Country Emergency
services
Police
Breakdown service
Helpful notes
17
250 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions
For information, the speed limits (in km/h) and permissible dimensions (in m) of the
countries visited most:
X Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries.
Country Max. dimen-
sions in meters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
Belgium 2.55 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/120
1)
60/90
1)
120
90
Bulgaria 2.60 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
130
100
Denmark 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80
70
130
80
Germany 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
3.5 t up to
7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
2)
50
50
50
100
80
80
130
3)
100
80
Estonia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Finland 2.60 12 50
80
4)
80
4)
France 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
5)
/-
80
5)
/
100
1) 5)
130
5)
110
5)
Greece 2.50 12 50
90/110
11)
120
Great Brit-
ain
2.55 12 48
96/112
1)
112
Ireland 2.55 12 50
60/100
1)
120
Iceland 2.55 12 50
90
6)
–
Italy 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/110
1) 7)
80
130
7)
100
Croatia 2.55 12 50
90/110
1)
130
Latvia 2.50 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/100
11)
80
110
80
Lithuania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Luxem-
bourg
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
8) 7)
75
7)
130
8) 7)
90
7)
Macedonia 2.50 12 40/60 80 80
Montene-
gro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Helpful notes
17
251Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Nether-
lands
2.55
9)
12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
120
80
Norway 2.55 12.40 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80
90
80
Austria 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
100
70
130
10)
80
Poland 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
1)
70/80
1)
130
80
Portugal 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
11)
80/90
11)
120
12)
110
12)
Romania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80/90
1)
120
110
Russia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
13)
70
110
13)
90
13)
Sweden 2.60
24
14)
Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
70-110
1) 11)
80/90
1)
110
90
Switzer-
land
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over
3.5 t
15)
50
50
80/100
1)
80/100
1)
120
100
Serbia and
Montene-
gro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Slovakia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
80
130
80
Slovenia 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Spain 2.55 12 50
70/80
1)
90
Czech Re-
public
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
80
130
80
Turkey 2.50 10 50 80 90
Ukraine 2.50 12 60
90
13)
110
13)
Hungary 2.50 12 Up to 2.5 t
Over 2.5 t
50
50
90/110
1)
70
130
80
Cyprus 2.55 12 50 80 100
1)
On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction
2)
Vehicles over 7.5 tons max. permissible weight require a tachograph
3)
Recommended speed: 130 km/h
4)
Since 1995, for the first time, vehicles up to an unladen weight of 1875 kg and vehicles
up to 3.5 t perm gross weight with appropriate equipment (ABS, driver airbag, seat belts
on all seats) can drive max. 100 km/h
5)
On wet roads, reduce speed by 10 km/h, on motorways by 20 km/h
Country Max. dimen-
sions in meters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
Helpful notes
17
252 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Date 06/2008
Source: ADAC
Specifications without guarantee
17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas
6)
On unmade roads (gravel): 80 km/h
7)
In wet conditions, reduce speed by 20 km/h
8)
Drivers who don't have their driver's licence for the full year, must not drive faster than
max. 75 km/h when out of town or 90 km/h on motorways
9)
On main roads 2.55 m, on roads marked "B" 2.20 m
10)
Between 10 p.m. and 5 a.m. the speed limit on the following motorways is
100 km/h: A10 (Tauernautobahn), A12 (Inntalautobahn), A13 (Brennerautobahn), A14
(Rheintalautobahn)
11)
According to traffic signs
12)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than one year must not drive faster
than 90 km/h. Corresponding stickers (available from ACP offices) must be affixed in a
clearly visible position on the rear of the vehicle
13)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive faster
than 70 km/h
14)
Swedish campsites often require the motorhome to have a closed waste water system
15)
A heavy goods vehicle supplement must be paid on all roads for all vehicles exceeding
3.5 tons max. permissible weight
Z In many European countries, it is compulsory to drive with the vehicle's lights
on even during the day. Regulations vary between countries. Motoring organi-
sations or consulates can provide you with the relevant information.
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
Belgium X X On highway rest areas
max. 24 hours permitted
Bulgaria X X
Denmark X X On streets and squares only up to
11 hours with a parking disc
Germany X X Staying overnight for one night to
restore driving ability is permit-
ted. There may be regional and lo-
cal limitations
Finland X X Possible with the permission of
the land owner
France X X Permission from the local authori-
ties or the owner of the land is re-
quired. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is prohib-
ited
Greece X X Staying overnight for one night at
designated areas on the national
route Patras-Athens-Thessaloniki
is permitted
Helpful notes
17
253Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Great Britain X X
Ireland X X
Italy X X Staying overnight for one night at
car parks and service stations is al-
lowed. Observe the local regula-
tions. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is prohib-
ited
Croatia X X
Luxembourg X X
Macedonia X X
Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and
squares is allowed in some bor-
oughs
Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest areas
and cultivated grounds. Travelling
on dirt roads is prohibited
Austria X X Staying overnight for one night to
restore driving ability is permit-
ted, but not in nature reserves.
Observe regional and local restric-
tions. Generally forbidden in Tyrol
Poland X X Requires property owner's per-
mission
Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night
on motorway service stations and
car parks under 10 hours are toler-
ated
Romania X X
Russia X X
Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in the
vicinity of houses. Driving on
open fields is prohibited
Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway
rest areas and in some cantons is
tolerated
Serbia and
Montenegro
X X
Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Slovenia X X
Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap-
ply, especially on beaches
Czech Republic X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
Helpful notes
17
254 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Specifications without guarantee
17.6 Gas supply in European countries
General tips Always observe the following instructions:
z Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles.
z Use all of the gas bottles' capacity.
z Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas bot-
tles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator to for-
eign gas bottles.
z During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component
(butane does not gas below 0 °C).
z Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only use
gas bottles with safety valves.
z When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart-
ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries do
not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.
17.7 Toll regulations in European countries
Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll regu-
lations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country. Neverthe-
less, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe.
As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be familiar
with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in Austria the
vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh more than
3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged.
Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.
Turkey X X
Ukraine X X
Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately
owned land is permitted only with
police certification
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
Z In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It is not
always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign country. Get
information about the connection system in the country you are travelling to
before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club or in the trade press.
Z Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll collec-
tion systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when acquiring the
appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).
Helpful notes
17
255Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel
Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe
night in the motorhome.
The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules are
observed:
z Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and sky-
lights.
z During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking
areas located along typical vacation routes.
z Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease the
chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the parking site.
z Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site.
z When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the
driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within reach.
z Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the
journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate
vicinity of windows or doors.
z Always lock up the vehicle.
17.9 Tips for winter campers
The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable as
possible.
z Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are often
booked up early.
z Do not start your trip without winter tyres.
z Bring snow chains.
z Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you. Snow
and ice may melt.
z When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent
freezing.
z No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation.
z Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice.
z Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents moisture
from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area.
z Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid
thermal bridges.
z Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries".
z Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so that
the supply does not run out during the night.
z Only operate the gas system using propane gas.
z Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.
z Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the
vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning.
z Lay the 240 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen or be
damaged (e.g. during snow removal).
z When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly. A few
centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow quickly
becomes a heavy burden.
z Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof to
avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".
Helpful notes
17
256 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
17.10 Travel checklists
The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home although
not everything on the checklists might be necessary.
Z Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information) as
well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before commencing the
trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will save unnecessary
trouble.
Object Object Object
Kitchen area
Wiping cloth Cleansing agent (de-
tergent)
Salad servers
Mug Dishcloths Chopping board
Turnspit Set of knifes and
forks for grilling
Bowls
Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the
dishes
Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the
dishes
Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches
Lighter Spoons Cups
Bottle opener Knifes Plates
Air-tight storage
boxes
Garbage bags Thermos jug
Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots
Forks Stirring spoons Glasses
Bathroom/sanitary items
Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass
Sanitary items Toilet paper
Living area
Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes
Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit
Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park-
ing guide
Bath shoes Broom Rucksack
Batteries Candles Sleeping bags
Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper
Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes
Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish
Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner
Camping guide Map Flash light
Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife
Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth
Binoculars Neck-supporting pil-
low
Clothes pins
Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline
Helpful notes
17
257Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Gas bottle Radio
Vehicle/tools
Waste water con-
tainer
Fabric tape Screwdriver
Adapter socket Watering can for
drinking water
Current-measuring
instrument
CEE adapter Cable reel Step
Wire V-belt Wheel chocks
Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit
Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack
Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri-
angle
Replacement water
pump
Luster terminals Warning sign
Hammer Loops Warning vest
Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard
warning light
Gas filling adapter Hose clips
Gas tube Snow chains (winter)
Outside
Stay rope Camping table Lock
Bellows Luggage racks String
Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten-
ing ropes
Documents
List of addresses Registration book Identity card
Registration confir-
mation(s)
Driving licence Passport
Allergy certificate Green insurance
card
Writ of protection
Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi-
cate
Vignette/toll card
Instruction leaflets
for medicines
Credit card Visa
Object Object Object
Helpful notes
17
258 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
259Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
For Dometic toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
For the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
For Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135, 136
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
12 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 129
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 129
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 133
Power cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 128
240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
A
Access ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Access ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Access ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89
Accessories, fitting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adapter cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Additional equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Add-on parts see special equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air conditioning unit
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Air outlet nozzles, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
AL-KO rear axle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Appliances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Manuals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Automatic power selection (AES)
. . . . . . . . . . . .169, 174
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
B
Backrest adjustment mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Basic equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 131
Battery cut-off switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 123
Battery monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 124
Battery see starter battery and living area battery
. 116
Battery selector switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 123
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 129
Battery, wardrobe light, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Bike rack
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Travelling with a loaded bike rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Blind, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Blind, skylight with snap latch
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Blind, window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Boiler (Alde)
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158
Safety/drainage valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158
Summer operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159
Bonnet
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Brakes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 229
Braking system, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Branch block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Breakdown services in Europe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
260 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Halogen spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Surface-mounted halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Wardrobe light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Bunk bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Butane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 106
C
Cable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Camping gas bottles, use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 106
Camping in winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Cap, water drain neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Capacity of the battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Caravan coupling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Carpet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Driver's cabin insulation mat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Furniture surfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . . . . . 199
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
In the winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Net curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Seat belt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sink
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Synthetic parts, interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Teflon coverings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Toilets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Underbody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Upholstery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vacuum toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Carpet, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Central seating group
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 95
Changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Charging current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 207
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
For the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Initial start-up after temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . 209
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Children's beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86, 88, 89, 90
Circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Circulating pump, setting the rotational speed
. . . 148
261Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Circulating pump, switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 143
Cleaning
Water pipes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Cleaning see care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Closed circuit current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
On the double acrylic glass pane
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
On the screwed connections in the floor
. . . . . . . 64
Condensation water see condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Connecting cable see power cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Conventional load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 62
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Conversion door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60
Conversion door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Curtains, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
D
Danger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 64
Dimensions, permissible
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Discharging current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Displays
Battery voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 129
Current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Temperature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Waste water tank level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 131
Water tank level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 131
Disposal
Household waste
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sewage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Waste water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Dometic toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Water tank, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
Doors
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Driver's door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Double floor, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Drain cock, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Drain neck, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Drinking water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Drinking water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Driver's cabin insulation mat, care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Driver's door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Driver's door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Driver's door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Driver's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjusting an appropriate seating position
. .44, 46
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45
Driving speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Driving the motorhome
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DuoControl switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Duomatic switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
During the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
E
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
240 V connection, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . 230
Entrance step, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Explanation of terms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lighting, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Electrically adjustable external mirrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35, 53
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pushing in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Warning tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Environmental tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
262 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Exterior lighting
Checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
External connection see 240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . 55
External flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Flap lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External gas connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
External mirrors, electrically adjustable
Adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Mirror heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
F
Facing seating unit, sleeping conversion . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Family Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fault current protection switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Filling the tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fire
Behaviour in the event of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Extinguishing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fire risks, avoidance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fixed bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fixed table
Moving in a crossways direction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Flap lock
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64
Elliptical-shaped
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64
With recessed handle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Flat screen, positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Floor warming unit, electrical
Overload protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Fluorescent tubes, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Folding mechanism, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Forced ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 64
Freezer compartment door locking mechanism
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . 179
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Front bench seat, sleeping
conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99, 100, 101
Front passenger's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjusting an appropriate seating position
. .44, 46
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45
Front seating group, sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . 102
Fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Furniture flaps, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Furniture surfaces, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fuse box see 240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . 137
Fuses
12 V fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
240 V fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 137
For the Dometic toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
For the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
For the Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fuses see 12 V fuses and 240 V fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
G
Gas bottle compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 106
Gas bottles
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 106
Gas connection, external
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Gas consumption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Gas cooker
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 139
Gas odour
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 105, 232
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Gas supply in European countries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
263Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Defect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 105, 232
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Hose break guard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 105
Switching automatics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 113
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Gas tube, check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 106
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Guarantee
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Guarantee conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
H
Halogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Handbrake
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Applying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Handling of tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Headrests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Heat exchanger (Alde)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Heat exchanger (Arizona)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Heat exchangers, heater, replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . .139
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Air outlet nozzles, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 143
Heat exchangers, replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Hot air distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Initial start-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Heater for the waste water tank and waste
water pipes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Heater, external mirrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Heki skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Help on Europe's roads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
High rate of gas consumption
. . . . . . . . . . . 21, 105, 232
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Hinged window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Continuous ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Hose break guard, gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Hot air distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Hot-air heater
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 143
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 141, 143
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 144
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 143
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Hot-water heater
240 V electrical operation, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . 147
Adjustment menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Auxiliary circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fluid level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Gas and 240 V electrical operation, selecting
. 147
Gas operation, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heat exchanger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Heater, switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Heating fluid, topping up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Heating system, bleeding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Maintenance work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Operating unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Rotational speed, circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . 148
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Start screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tool menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
I
Independent vehicle heater
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Indicator lamp, 12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Indicator lamp, 240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . 127, 128
Indicator lamp, toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 194, 195
Individual seats, conversion for sleeping
. . . . . . . . . . 104
Information stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Initial start-up
After temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
After winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
264 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Inner door, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Insect screen door
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Folding in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Insect screen, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Insect screen, conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Insect screen, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Insect screen, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Insect screen, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Inspection records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Inspection work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Interior lighting
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
L
Ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89
Ladder, rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 215
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lay-up
Temporary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Leakage water inside the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Lift-off table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Light switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Lighting
Lamps, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Lights see bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Living area battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 131
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Charging current, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Discharging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Discharging current, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 231
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 129
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Bike rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Double floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load rack, extendable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Roof rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Load rack for roof loads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Load rack, extendable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Load see also payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lock
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58
External flap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
Low beam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
L-seating group, sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . 103
M
Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
AL-KO rear axle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Independent vehicle heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Mass in ready-to-drive condition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 27
Maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . . . . . . .25, 27
Mechanical steady legs
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Length, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Microwave oven
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
265Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
N
Net curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
No gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Nose weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
O
Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Off-load voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Oil level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Operating modes
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 158
Hot-air heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 141, 143
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 169, 171, 172, 176
Switching automatics, gas system
. . . . . . .112, 114
Oven see gas cooker or gas oven
. . . . . . . 162, 163, 164
Overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Folding mechanism
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Overloading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
P
Panel (IT 992) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Filling level of the water tank, displaying
. . . . . .126
Switch for water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Panel (IT922)
Switch for circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Panel (MP 20-T)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Alarms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Battery displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Tank display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Tank heater switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Temperature display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Time display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Panel see also displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Composition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Example calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27
Payload see also load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Permissible gross weight see maximum permissible
gross weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Permitted mass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Personal equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power cable for the 240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Propane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 106
Pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 88
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 89
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 88
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 88
Retaining straps, tightening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PVC-floor covering, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
R
Range hood
Filter, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Rear axle load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rear ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 166
12 V operation, switching
on/off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 172, 174, 178
240 V operation, switching
on/off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 172, 173, 177
Change-over between energy sources
. . 170, 175
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 179
Frame heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Gas operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Gas operation, switching off
. . . . . . . 168, 171, 173
Gas operation, switching on
. . . . . . . 167, 171, 173
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . .167, 169, 171, 172, 176
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 176
Refrigerating temperature control
. . . . . . 170, 175
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 236, 237
Ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Refrigerator door locking mechanism
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . . . . 179, 180
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 179, 180
Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
266 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Remote control, air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Remote control, air conditioning unit (Truma)
. . . . .152
Risk of frost damage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 181, 188
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Notes for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Roman shade, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Roman shade, driver's cabin
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Roman shade, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Roman shade, window of conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Roman shade, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Roman shade, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Roof load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Roof rack, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Roof rail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Round seating group, sleeping conversion
. . . . . 96, 97
S
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Gas bottles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 105
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety net, bunk bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Safety net, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Safety net, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89
Safety/drainage valve boiler
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 158
Sanitary fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Seat belts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjusting correctly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Fastening correctly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Seating arrangement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seating groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Seats, rotating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Serial number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Sewage tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Shower
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Sink, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Skylight with snap latch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 73
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72, 73
Skylights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Sleeping conversion
Central seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93, 95
Facing seating unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Front bench seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99, 100, 101
Front seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Individual seats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
L-seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Round seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 97
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sliding window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Snow chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Spare parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Spare wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Spare wheel support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Special equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Marking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Weight details
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Speed limits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Spotlight
Shifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Turning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Starter battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 129
Staying overnight
Away from camping areas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
During travel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Length, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55
267Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Supports see steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
Surface-mounted halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Suspension table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 78
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 78
Reducing size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 78
Switch for water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Switching automatics, gas system
. . . . . . . . . . .110, 113
Swivel table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fastening to the floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Symbols
For instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 139
Synthetic parts in the toilet and living areas,
cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
T
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table, fixed
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table-top, folding to the side
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tank alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Tank heater, switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Tank lid see fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Teflon coverings, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Television
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 82
Positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Storing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Swiveling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Temperature display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Thetford cassette, retaining clip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Thetford toilet
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193, 194
Fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193, 194
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Water tank, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Time, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135, 136
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Toilet cassette
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Unlocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Toilet compartment, pull-out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Toll regulations in European countries
. . . . . . . . . . . 254
Total discharge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Traffic rules in foreign countries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Travel checklists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Travel cots suitable for children
. . . . . 84, 86, 88, 89, 90
268 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Boiler (Alde)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Braking system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Furniture flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Hot-air heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Inner door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Microwave oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 236, 237
Starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Vacuum toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Water supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
TV cabinet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tyre change see changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Tyre specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Excessive wear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 38, 223, 226
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Handling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Identification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Load-carrying capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Tyre pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Tyre selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
U
Underbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Unladen weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Upholstery, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
V
Vacuum toilet
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Indicator lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Putting into operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Valve, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Vario toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Converting into a shower cubicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Converting into toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . 192
Vehicle identification plate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vehicle manuals and documents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Vehicle, washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Volume of waste water, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . 126, 131
Volume of water, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 131
W
Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 219
Warning stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Washer fluid, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
. . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Waste gas vent on the right hand side of the
vehicle.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 155
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 186
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 186
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 131
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Waste water tap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 186
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Water pipes, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 187
Water pump, switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Water supply
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Water system
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Disinfect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Drinking water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
269Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
Water tank
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 131
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Water, draining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Water tank see also water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Weatherproof guarantee
Conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inspection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Inspection stamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Weight details for special equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Wheel chocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Wheel rim size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Wheel rim type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Window winders, electrical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Window, conversion door
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71
Wind-up skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Winter care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Writing and reading rest
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
270 Motorcaravan - 12-10 - EN
Index
… 7 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,65 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome

Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 278 pagina's

Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 282 pagina's

Dethleffs 2011 Motorhome Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 288 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info